TABLE OF CONTENTS When driving - Lexus Drivers · 2016-06-23 · TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 Before...

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mir-rors, and steering column.

2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

3 Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4 Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-your-self maintenance, and maintenance information.

5 When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information.

7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt in-structions for Canadian owners

Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

2

1-1. Key information

Keys ...................................................... 20

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system with push-button start .......................... 22

Wireless remote control .............. 34

Doors.................................................... 37

Trunk...................................................... 41

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats.......................................... 43

Driving position memory (driver’s seat) ................................. 44

Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat) ............. 47

Head restraints................................. 49

Seat belts ........................................... 50

Steering wheel.................................. 56

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ................................................ 57

Outside rear view mirrors.......... 58

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows................................ 60

Moon roof .......................................... 63

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap........... 67

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system......... 70

Alarm.................................................... 72

Theft prevention labels ................. 74

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture ............... 75

SRS airbags ....................................... 77

Front passenger occupant classification system................... 88

Child restraint systems ................. 93

Installing child restraints ............... 97

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle........................ 108

Engine (ignition) switch ................ 116

Automatic Transmission .............. 119

Turn signal lever............................. 122

Parking brake ................................. 123

Horn.................................................... 124

1 Before driving

2 When driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

3

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters ..................... 125

Indicators and warning lights .... 127

Multi-information display............. 131

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch............................ 135

Fog light switch .............................. 138

Windshield wipers and washer............................................. 139

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control ................................ 143

Dynamic radar cruise control............................................. 146

Intuitive parking assist ................. 155

Driving assist systems.................... 161

PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 164

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage...................... 168

Vehicle load limits........................... 171

Winter driving tips ......................... 172

Trailer towing.................................. 178

Dinghy towing ................................ 185

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system ............................................. 188

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ............. 195

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system type ........................ 196

Using the radio............................... 198

Using the CD player.................. 205

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs..................................... 211

Optimal use of the audio system ............................................. 219

Using the AUX adapter............ 222

Using the steering wheel audio switches ............................ 223

3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free phone system features (for cellular phone)................... 225

Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ... 228

Making a phone call.................... 236

Setting a cellular phone............. 240

Security and system setup........ 244

Using the phone book................ 247

3 Interior features

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

4

3-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list............................ 253• Interior lights ............................... 255• Personal lights ............................ 255

3-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features............... 256• Glove box..................................... 256• Console box................................ 257• Overhead console.................... 259• Cup holders................................ 260• Auxiliary box ............................... 262

3-6. Other interior features

Sun visors......................................... 263

Vanity mirror.................................. 264

Clock................................................. 265

Ashtray ............................................. 266

Cigarette lighter ........................... 267

Power outlet .................................. 268

Seat heaters.................................... 269

Seat heaters and ventilators ..... 271

Armrest ............................................ 273

Rear sunshade............................... 274

Extended trunk.............................. 276

Floor mat.......................................... 277

Trunk features................................ 278

Garage door opener................. 280

Compass......................................... 286

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior .......................... 292

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior............................ 295

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements .... 298

General maintenance ............... 300

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ..................................... 303

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions................................. 304

Hood................................................. 308

Positioning a floor jack.............. 309

Engine compartment..................... 311

Tires ................................................... 326

Tire inflation pressure................. 334

Wheels............................................. 338

Air conditioning filter................. 340

Electronic key battery ................ 342

Checking and replacing fuses ................................................ 344

Headlight aim................................. 352

Light bulbs....................................... 354

4 Maintenance and care

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

5

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers..................... 364

If your vehicle needs to be towed.............................................. 365

If you think something is wrong .............................................. 371

Fuel pump shut off system ........ 372

Event data recorder.................... 373

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ...... 375

If a warning message is displayed...................................... 386

If you have a flat tire..................... 397

If the engine will not start .......... 407

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P............................. 409

If you lose your keys ..................... 410

If the electronic key does not operate properly .......................... 411

If the vehicle battery is discharged .................................... 413

If your vehicle overheats ............ 416

If the vehicle becomes stuck .... 419

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 422

Fuel information............................ 432

Tire information ............................ 435

6-2. Customization

Customizable features .............. 447

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize ........................... 452

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners........................... 454

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).................................... 455

Abbreviation list ...................................458

Alphabetical index............................... 460

What to do if... ....................................... 470

5 When trouble arises 6 Vehicle specifications

7 For owners

Index

6

Pictorial index Exterior

Headlights (high beam) P. 135

Turn signal lights P. 122

Side marker lights P. 135

Headlights (low beam) P. 135

Hood P. 308

Windshield wipers P. 139

Moon roof P. 63

Outside rear viewmirrors P. 58

Fog lights P. 138

Parking lightsP. 135

7

Tires●Rotation●Replacement●Inflation pressure

P. 326

P. 397

P. 429

Tail lights P. 135

Side marker lights P. 135

Trunk P. 41

Rear window defogger P. 195

Doors P. 37

Fuel filler door P. 67

Turn signal lights P. 122

8

A

Pictorial index Interior

Power window switches P. 60

SRS front passenger airbag P. 77

SRS knee airbags P. 77

SRS driver airbag P. 77

Floor mat P. 277

Console box P. 257

Seat belts P. 50

Front seats P. 43

SRS side airbags P. 77

Power outlet P. 268

AUX adapter P. 222

Head restraints P. 49

Cup holders P. 260

Armrest P. 273

9

ACompass P. 286

Garage door opener switches P. 280

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 57

Moon roof switches P. 63

Personal lights P. 255

Interior lights P. 255

Vanity mirrors P. 264

Sun visors P. 263

Personal lights P. 255

SRS curtain shield airbag P. 77

Overhead console P. 259

10

B

Door lock switch P. 37

Power window switches P. 60

Pictorial index Interior

Driving position memory switches Seat position memory switches

P. 44

P. 47

Window lock switch P. 60

Inside door lock button P. 37

11

C

Seat heater switches Seat heater and ventilator switches

P. 269

P. 271

Automatic transmission shift lever P. 119

Shift lock override button P. 409

Cigarette lighter Ashtray

P. 267

P. 266

Cup holders P. 260

: If equipped

12

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Headlight switch Turn signal lever Fog light switch

P. 135

P. 122

P. 138 Gauges and meters P. 125

Multi-information display P. 131

Windshield wipers andwasher switch P. 139

Engine (ignition) switch P. 116

Trunk opener main switch P. 41

Glove box P. 256

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 56

Parking brake pedal P. 123

Audio remote control switches P. 223

Hood lock release lever P. 308

Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 328

Adaptive front lighting system cancel switch P. 136

Tire pressure warning select switch P. 329

Horn P. 124

13

A Without navigation system

Navigation system*

Clock P. 265

Audio system P. 196

Air conditioningsystem P. 188

Rear window and out-side rear view mirror defoggers P. 195

Security indicator P. 70, 72

Emergency flasherswitch P. 364

Audio system*

Security indicator P. 70, 72

Emergency flasherswitch P. 364

Air conditioning system*

With navigation system

: If equipped*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

P. 195

Clock P. 265

14

Pictorial index Instrument panel

B

Telephone switch * P. 229

Cruise control switch P. 143, 146

Distance switch P. 148

DISP switch P. 132

Talk switch * P. 229

15

C

Rear sunshade switch P. 274

Intuitive parking assist switch * P. 155

Instrument panel light control P. 126

: If equipped*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Outside rear view mirror switch P. 58

Auxiliary box P. 262

Type A

Type B

Trunk opener P. 41

Fuel filler door opener P. 67

Rear sunshade switch P. 274

Instrument panel light control P. 126

Outside rear view mirror switch P. 58

Auxiliary box P. 262

Trunk opener P. 41

Fuel filler door opener P. 67

16

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, includ-ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installedon your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. How-ever, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve theright to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ fromyour vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles arecurrently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrantthese products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, yourLexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modificationwith non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-mance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under war-ranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affectelectronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiportfuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag sys-tem and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer forprecautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

17

Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosivechemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners leftas they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems ofthe SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualifiedservice shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components mayinclude airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION

■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence ofalcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcoholand certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other driversor pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distractsthe driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading canresult in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants orothers.

■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have oruse the key.

When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicleinto neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playingwith the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehi-cle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle canbe fatal to children.

18

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning isignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce therisk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or itsequipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or mustnot do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)used to operate switches and otherdevices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.a lid opens).

Before driving 1

19


Keys.............................................. 20


Smart access system with push-button start .................... 22

Wireless remote control ......... 34

Doors ............................................ 37

Trunk .............................................. 41


Front seats ................................... 43

Driving position memory (driver’s seat) ........................... 44

Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat) ....... 47

Head restraints .......................... 49

Seat belts .................................... 50

Steering wheel........................... 56

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ......................................... 57

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 58


Power windows .......................... 60

Moon roof ................................... 63

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap ...... 67


Engine immobilizer system.... 70

Alarm............................................ 72

Theft prevention labels ............ 74


Correct driving posture ......... 75

SRS airbags ................................ 77

Front passenger occupant classification system.............. 88

Child restraint systems ........... 93

Installing child restraints......... 97

20


Keys

Using the mechanical key

Take out the mechanical key.

After using the mechanical key,store it in the electronic key. Carrythe mechanical key together withthe electronic key. If the electronickey battery is depleted or the entryfunction does not operate properly,you will need the mechanical key.

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys• Operating the smart access

system with push-button start(P. 22)

• Operating the wirelessremote control function (P. 34)

Mechanical keysKey number plate

■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF and lock the glove box and the armrestdoor as circumstances demand. (P. 41, 256, 276)Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with theelectronic key only.

■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event thata mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the keynumber plate. (P. 410)

21


1

Before driving

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage

●Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures byplacing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

●Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material thatblocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

●Do not disassemble the electronic key.

22


Smart access system with push-button start

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the elec-tronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 23)Unlocks the trunk (P. 23)Starts the engine (P. 116)

23


1

Before driving

Unlocking and locking the doors

Grip the handle to unlock thedoor.

Make sure to touch the sensor onthe back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked for 3seconds after the door is locked.

Press the lock button to lock thedoor.

Pressing and holding the buttoncloses the windows and standardmoon roof.

Unlocking the trunk

Press and hold the button tounlock the trunk.

24


Antenna location and effective range

■ Antenna location

Antennas outside cabinAntennas inside cabinAntenna inside trunkAntenna outside trunk

25


1

Before driving

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlockingthe doors

The system can be operatedwhen the electronic key iswithin about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) ofany of the outside door han-dles. (Only the doors detect-ing the key can be operated.)

When unlocking the trunk

The system can be operatedwhen the electronic key iswithin about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) ofthe trunk release button.

When starting the engineor changing “ENGINESTART STOP” switchmodes

The system can be operatedwhen the electronic key isinside the vehicle.

26


■ Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doorshave been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.

Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windowsand standard moon roof are operating.

■ Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock thedoor is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle oncemore.

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the fol-lowing situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehiclemay be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start andwireless remote control from operating properly: (Ways of coping: P. 411)

●When the electronic key battery is depleted

●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-less communication devices

●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-lic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside• Metallic wallets or bags• Coins• Hand warmers made of metal• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity

27


1

Before driving

●When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devicesthat emit radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)• Digital audio players• Portable game systems

● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rearwindow

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push andhold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing

on the key.

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (Whenchanging the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,and repeat step 2.)

Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of thedoors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doorswill be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 72)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Multi-information display

Unlocking doors Beep

Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's door Exterior: Beeps three

timesInterior: Pings onceHold the door handle except

a driver’s door handle to unlock all doors

Hold any door handle to unlock all doors

Exterior: Beeps twiceInterior: Pings once

STEP 3

28


■ Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent thevehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.

●When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more

●When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of thevehicle for 10 minutes or more

The system will resume operation when...

●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.

●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function. (P. 34)

●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 411)

■ Electronic key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

●The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used becausethe key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-but-ton start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection areabecomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when nec-essary. ( P. 342)

●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) ofthe following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.

• TVs• Personal computers• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones• Glass top ranges• Table lamps

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get theelectronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outsideof the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key maynot be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm maygo off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)

29


1

Before driving

■ Note for the entry function

●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), thesystem may not operate properly in the following cases.

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near theground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to therear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or inthe glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switchmodes are changed.

●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may belocked or unlocked by anyone.

●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start theengine if the electronic key is near the window.

●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked afterapproximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic keyis near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by theentry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doorsfrom being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original positionand check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) ofthe vehicle.

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle isunlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.

30


■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on themulti-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeableaccidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures inresponse to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 386)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when onlyalarms are sounded.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds

Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment

Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again.

Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside the trunk and all doors are locked

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.


Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and lock the doors again.


Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Exterior alarm sounds once for 3 seconds and inte-rior alarm sounds continuously

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCES-SORY or IGNITION ON mode, an attempt was made to open the door and exit the vehicle, and the shift lever was not in P.

Shift the shift lever to P.

31


1

Before driving

■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly

●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 411)

●Starting the engine:P. 116

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 342

■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer

Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be deactivated.(Customizable features P. 447)

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the USA

FCC ID: NI4TMLF-3

FCC ID: HYQ14AAB

FCC ID: HYQ13BZH

FCC ID: HYQ14ABK

FCC ID: HYQ13BZW

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Interior alarm pings continuously

Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCES-SORY mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCES-SORY mode.)

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.

Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF while the driver's door is open

Close the driver's door.

32


NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

NOTICE:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class Bdigital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed toprovide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interferencewill not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference byone or more of the following measures:

●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

33


1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep awayfrom the smart access system antennas. (P. 24)The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entryfunction can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequencyof radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctorto see if you should disable the entry function.

●User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device forinformation about its operation under the influence of radio waves.Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medicaldevices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

34


Wireless remote control

■ Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doorshave been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.

Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windowsand standard moon roof are operating.

■ Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock thedoor is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle oncemore.


P. 28

■ Security feature

P. 29

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle andthe trunk from outside the vehicle.

Locks all doorsUnlocks all doors

Pressing the button unlocks thedriver’s door. Pressing the but-ton again within 3 secondsunlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows andstandard moon roof (push and hold)Unlocks the trunk (push and hold)Sounds alarm (push and hold) (P. 72)

35


1

Before driving

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 342


P. 26


Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable featuresP. 447)

■ Certification for wireless remote control


FCC ID: HYQ14AAB

FCC ID: HYQ13BZH

FCC ID: HYQ14ABK

FCC ID: HYQ13BZW

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.






36



NOTE:Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

■ Certification for wireless remote control

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

37

1


Before driving

Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wirelessremote control or door lock switch.

■ Entry functionP. 22

■ Wireless remote controlP. 34

■ Door lock switch

Locks all doorsUnlocks all doors

■ Inside lock button

Locks the doorUnlocks the door

The front doors can be openedby pulling the inside handle evenif the lock buttons are in the lockposition.

38


Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is leftinside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detectedcorrectly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be openedfrom inside the vehicle when thelocks are set.

These locks can be set to preventchildren from opening the reardoors. Push down on each reardoor switch to lock both reardoors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or cancelled:

Function Operation

Shift position linked door locking function

Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.

Speed linked door locking function

All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

39


1

Before driving

■ Setting and canceling the functionsTo switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:

Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10seconds.)

Shift the shift lever to P or N, andpress and hold the driver's doorlock switch ( or ) for approxi-mately 5 seconds and thenrelease.

The shift lever and switch positionscorresponding to the desired func-tion to be set or canceled areshown as follows.

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are lockedand then unlocked.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Function Shift lever position Switch position

Shift position linked door locking function

PShift position linked door unlock-ing function

Speed linked door locking function

NDriver's door linked door unlocking function

40


■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the systemmay not operate.

■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 411)


Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable fea-tures P. 447)

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting indeath or serious injury.

●Always use a seat belt.

●Always lock all doors.

●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and itmay result in serious injury or death.

Be especially careful for the front doors, the doors may be opened even if theinside lock buttons are in locked position.

●Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.

41

1


Before driving

Trunk

Locking the trunk opener feature

Turn the main switch in the glovebox OFF to disable the trunkopener.

ONOFF

The trunk lid cannot be openedeven with the trunk opener, thewireless remote control or theentry function.

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wirelessremote control.

■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Release the trunk lid.

■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicleEntry functionP. 22

Wireless remote controlP. 34

42


■ Trunk handle

■ Internal trunk release lever

■ Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the trunk lid closed.This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also preventsexhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in thevehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate, resulting indeath or serious injury.

Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling downon the glow-in-the-dark lever located on theinside of trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some timeafter the trunk lid is closed.

43

1

Before driving


Front seats

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment

Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reducethe risk of sliding under the lap belt.If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increas-ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Seat position switchSeatback angle switchSeat cushion (front) angle switchVertical height adjustment switchLumbar support switchSeat leg support adjusting switch (driver’s seat) (if equipped)

44


Driving position memory (driver’s seat)

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steeringwheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled withthe touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate auto-matically when the doors are unlocked.Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.

■ Entering a position to memoryCheck that the shift lever is set in P.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ONmode. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear viewmirrors to the desired positions.

While pushing the SET button,push button 1 or 2 until the sig-nal beeps.

If the selected button hasalready been preset, the previ-ously recorded position will beoverwritten.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

: If equipped

45


1

Before driving

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the fol-lowing.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close thedriver's door.

While pressing the desired button(1 or 2), press on the wire-less remote control until the signalbeeps.

The driving position is recalledwhen the driver's door is unlockedusing the entry function or wirelessremote control and the driver’sdoor is opened.

Open one of the doors.If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, thedoors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 72)

■ Recalling the memorized positionCheck that the shift lever is set in P.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ONmode.

Push button 1 or 2 to recall thememorized position.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

46


■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.

While pushing the SET button, press on the wireless remote con-trol until the signal beeps.

■ Retained accessory power

Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated upto 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch OFF.

■ To cancel seat position recall

Perform any of the following operations.

●Push the SET button.

●Push button 1 or 2.

●Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).

■ If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger orsqueeze your body against the steering wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

47

1


Before driving

Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat)

Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized andrecalled with the touch of a button. Two different seat positions can be entered into memory.

■ Entering a position to memoryCheck that the shift lever is set in P.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ONmode. Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.

While pushing the SET button,push button 1 or 2 until the sig-nal beeps.

If the selected button hasalready been preset, the previ-ously recorded position will beoverwritten.

■ Recalling the memorized positionCheck that the shift lever is set in P.

Push button 1 or 2 to recall thememorized position.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

: If equipped

48


■ Retained accessory power

Memorized position can be activated up to 30 seconds after the front passengerdoor is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

■ To cancel seat position recall

Perform any of the following operations.

●Push the SET button.

●Push button 1 or 2.

●Adjust the seat position using the switches.

■ If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.

49

1


Before driving

Head restraints

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

CAUTION

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do somay result in death or serious injury.

●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Vertical adjustment

Push and hold the lock releasebutton when lowering the headrestraint.

Removal

Pull the head restraint up whilepushing the lock release button.

Lockreleasebutton

Make sure that the head restraints areadjusted so that the center of the headrestraint is closest to the top of your ears.

50


Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving thevehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt sothat it comes fully over theshoulder, but does not comeinto contact with the neck orslide off the shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low aspossible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of theseatback. Sit up straight andwell back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle untila clicking sound is heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

Release button

51


1

Before driving

Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)

If the shoulder belt sits close to aperson’s neck, slide the seat beltcomfort guide forward.

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)

The pretensioner helps the seatbelt to quickly restrain the occu-pant by retracting the seat beltwhen the vehicle is subjected tocertain types of severe frontal colli-sion.

The pretensioner may not activatein the event of a minor frontalimpact, a side impact or a rearimpact.

■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)

DownUp

Move the height adjuster up anddown as needed until you hear aclick.

52


Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)

When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that acollision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retractingthe slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining thedriver and passenger at an earlier stage.The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (P. 164)

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock ifyou lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so thatyou can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted evenslightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature isused to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fullyretract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 97)

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat beltin the proper way. (P. 50)

Women who are pregnant should positionthe lap belt as low as possible over the hips inthe same manner as other occupants. Extendthe shoulder belt completely over the shoul-der and position the belt across the chest.Avoid belt contact over the rounding of theabdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only apregnant woman, but also the fetus could suf-fer death or serious injury as a result of sud-den braking or a collision.

53


1

Before driving

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomelarge enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 93)

●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,follow the instructions on P. 50 regarding seat belt usage.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for thefirst collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of suddenbraking or an accident.Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

●Always wear a seat belt properly.

●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for morethan one person at once, including children.

●Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seatbelt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securelybecause they are not long enough, a person-alized seat belt extender is available fromyour Lexus dealer free of charge.

54


CAUTION

●Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seatingposition. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straightand well back in the seats.

●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoul-der. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and causedeath or serious injuries in a collision. (P. 51)

■ Seat belt pretensioners

●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing sowill disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detectingthe passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for thefront passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur-ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot beused again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.

■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution

Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the beltbecomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt outleading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occursand the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

55


1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ Seat belt damage and wear

●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammedin the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannotprotect an occupant from death or serious injury.

●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexusdealer.

●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved ina serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.

●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate han-dling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting indeath or serious injury.

■ Using a seat belt extender

●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without theextender.

●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system becausethe belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk ofdeath or injury in the event of a collision.

●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used byanother person, or at a different seating position other than the one originallyintended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt.This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

56


Steering wheel

Auto tilt away

When the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch is turned OFF, thesteering wheel returns to itsstowed position by moving up andaway to enable easier driver entryand exit.

Turning the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch to ACCESSORY orIGNITION ON mode will returnthe steering wheel to the originalposition.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode.

UpDownAway from the driverToward the driver

CAUTION


Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting indeath or serious injury.

57

1


Before driving

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

■ To prevent sensor error

CAUTION


Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in deathor serious injury.

In AUTO mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehiclesbehind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns AUTO mode ON/OFF

The indicator comes on whenAUTO mode is turned ON.

The anti-glare mirror defaultmode is AUTO. The anti-glaremirror is automatically set toAUTO whenever the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch is turnedon.

To ensure that the sensors operate properly,do not touch or cover it.

58


Outside rear view mirrors

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 195)

■ Folding back the mirrors

■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touchof a button. (P. 44)

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

Select a mirror to adjust(L: left or R: right)Adjust the mirror up, down,in, or out using the switch

Push back in the direction of the vehicle'srear.

59


1

Before driving

■ Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)

The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicleis reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function willnot operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between L andR).

■ Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to AUTO mode, the outside rearview mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror toreduce reflected light. (P. 57)

CAUTION

■ When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,resulting in death or serious injury.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

●Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properlyadjusted before driving.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.

60


Power windows

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock pas-senger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent childrenfrom accidentally opening or clos-ing a passenger window.

The power windows can be opened and closed using the followingswitches.

ClosingOne-touch closing*OpeningOne-touch opening*

*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-site direction will stop windowtravel partway.

61


1

Before driving

■ The power windows can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Linked door lock window operation

●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 411)

●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P.34)

●The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 22)

■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switchOFF

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turnedOFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, windowtravel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.


Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable featuresP. 447)

62


CAUTION

■ Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in aposition where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

●Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in someinstances, even death.


●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection functionintentionally.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just beforethe window fully closes.

63

1


Before driving

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up anddown.

■ Opening and closingStandard type

Open

The moon roof stops slightlybefore the fully opened position.Push the switch again to fullyopen.

Close

Push the switch in the either direc-tion to stop the moon roof partway.

Glass typeOpenClose (push and hold)

The moon roof stops once. Pushand hold the switch again to fullyclose.

64


■ Tilting up and downStandard type

Tilt upTilt down

Push the switch in the either side tostop the moon roof partway.

Glass typeTilt up

Push the switch in the either sideto stop the moon roof partway.

Tilt down (push and hold)

65


1

Before driving

■ The moon roof can be operated when


■ Linked door lock moon roof operation (standard type)

●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 411)

●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 34)

●The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 23)

■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turnedOFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.


If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tiltingdown, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■ To reduce moon roof wind noise (standard type)

Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as drivingwith the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.

■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade willopen automatically when the moon roof is opened.


Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable featuresP. 447)

66


CAUTION

■ Opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle whileit is moving.

●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in aposition where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.


●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection functionintentionally.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just beforethe moon roof fully closes.

67

1

Before driving

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

■ Before refueling the vehicleTurn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that allthe doors and windows are closed.

■ Opening the fuel tank cap

Open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly toopen.

Hang the fuel tank cap on theback of the fuel filler door.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

68

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap

When replacing the fuel tank cap,turn it until a clicking sound isheard.

After releasing your hand, the capwill turn slightly to the oppositedirection.

■ Fuel types

Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] orhigher)

■ Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)

■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable

The lever can be used to open the fuel fillerdoor if the fuel filler door cannot be openedusing the inside switch because the battery isdischarged or for any other reason.

69

1-5. Refueling

1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, mayresult in death or serious injury.

●Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors toignite.

●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait untilthe sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressur-ized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies tocome close to an open fuel tank.

●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is staticallycharged.This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or seri-ous injury.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling. Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems tooperate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's paintedsurface.

70


Engine immobilizer system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (keywith a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system


FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.


Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the enginefrom starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle'son-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes afterthe “ENGINE START STOP”switch has been turned OFF toindicate that the system is oper-ating.

71


1

Before driving

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the key

Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unautho-rized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system can-not be guaranteed.

72


Alarm

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following:

● Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function or the wirelessremote door lock function.

● Start the engine.

■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, check that there is no one in the vehi-cle, and that all windows and moon roof are closed before locking the vehicle.

The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry isdetected.

Close the moon roof and allwindows. Stop the engine.

The engine immobilizer systemcauses the indicator light toflash.

After all people exit out of thevehicle, close the doors, trunkand hood, and lock all doors.

The indicator light comes on.

The indicator light changes frombeing on to a flashing patternwhen the alarm system is set.

73


1

Before driving

■ Panic mode

■ When the battery is disconnected

Be sure to cancel the alarm system. If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggeredwhen the battery is reconnected.

When is pushed for longer than aboutone second, the headlights/tail lights/emer-gency flashers will flash, the front and rearinterior lights will come on, and an alarm willsound for about 60 seconds to deter anyperson from trying to break into or damageyour vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on thewireless remote control.

74


Theft prevention labels (for USA)

These labels are attached to thevehicle to reduce vehicle theftby facilitating the tracing andrecovery of parts from stolenvehicles. Do not remove underpenalty of law.

75

1

Before driving


Correct driving posture

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back inthe seat. (P. 43)Adjust the position of the seatforward or backward toensure the pedals can bereached and easilydepressed to the extentrequired. (P. 43)Adjust the seatback so thatthe controls are easily opera-ble.Adjust the tilt and telescopicpositions of the steeringwheel downward so the air-bag is facing your chest. (P. 56)Lock the head restraint inplace with the center of thehead restraint closest to thetop of your ears. (P. 49)Wear the seat belt correctly.(P. 50)

76


CAUTION

■ While driving

●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce theeffectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death orserious injury to the driver or passenger.

●Do not place anything under the front seats.Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks andstop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustmentmechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position:

●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers arenot injured by the moving seat.

●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

77

1


Before driving

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types ofsevere impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. Theywork together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or seriousinjury.

Front airbagsDriver airbag/front passenger airbagCan help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passen-ger from impact with interior components.Knee airbagsCan help provide driver and front passenger protection.

Side and curtain shield airbagsSide airbagsCan help protect the torso of the front seat occupants and rear seatoutside occupants (if equipped).Curtain shield airbagsCan help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.

78


Airbag system components

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed basedon US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag systemcontrols airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. Thedriver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. Thefront passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupantclassification sensor etc.

Front passenger airbagCurtain shield airbagsAIR BAG ON and AIR BAGOFF indicator lightsSide airbags for the front pas-sengersSide and curtain shield airbagsensorsCurtain shield airbag sensorsSide airbags for the rear out-side passengers (if equipped)

SRS warning lightDriver airbagDriver's seat position sensorKnee airbagsDriver's seat belt buckle switchFront passenger’s seat beltbuckle switchAirbag sensor assemblyOccupant detection system(ECU and sensors)Front airbag sensors

79


1

Before driving

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS air-bag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sen-sor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag systemtriggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-pants.

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)SRS airbag.

●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) aswell as the seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may behot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

●The front windshield may crack.

■ Operating conditions (front airbags)

●The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above thedesigned threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) col-lision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not moveor deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

●The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sittingin the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy ifluggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccu-pied. (P. 88)

80


■ Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)

●The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.

●The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen-ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.(P. 88)

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-sion

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside ofyour vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involvedin a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal colli-sion. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration ofthe vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hardsurface

●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

●Landing hard or vehicle falling

●Collision from the rear

●Collision from the side

●Vehicle rollover

81


1

Before driving

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicleis subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side ofthe vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it isinvolved in a low-speed side collision.

●Collision from the side to the vehicle bodyother than the passenger compartment

●Collision from the side at an angle

●Collision from the rear

●Collision from the front

●Vehicle rollover

82


■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not dis-connect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

●The front of the vehicle is damaged ordeformed, or was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to cause theSRS airbags to inflate.

●A portion of the doors is damaged ordeformed, or the vehicle was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

●The pad section of the steering wheel,dashboard near the front passenger airbagor lower portion of the instrument panel isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

●The portion of the containing the side air-bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillarsor roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-taining the curtain shield airbags inside isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

83


1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death orserious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with aclear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steeringwheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you canchange your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedalscomfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many driv-ers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all theway forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If recliningthe back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using afirm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbagtoward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still main-taining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrumentpanel controls.

84


CAUTION


●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and cancause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to theairbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible withthe seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use aseat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus stronglyrecommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicleand properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.(P. 93)

● If the seat belt extender has been con-nected to the driver's seat belt buckle butthe seat belt extender has not also beenfastened to the latch plate of the driver'sseat belt, the SRS driver's airbag systemwill judge that the driver is wearing the seatbelt even though the seat belt has not beenconnected. In this case, the driver's airbagmay not activate correctly in a collision,resulting in death or serious injury in theevent of collision. Be sure to wear the seatbelt with the seat belt extender.

85


1

Before driving

CAUTION


●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or leanagainst the dashboard.

●Do not allow a child to stand in front of theSRS front passenger airbag unit or sit onthe knees of a front passenger.

●Do not drive the vehicle while the driver orpassenger have items resting on theirknees.

●Do not lean against the door, the roof siderail or the front, side and rear pillars.

●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-senger seat toward the door or put theirhead or hands outside the vehicle.

86


CAUTION


● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, besure to remove it.

●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbagsinflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbagcomponents shown on P. 78.Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags havedeployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door orwindow to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad andfront pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexusdealer.

●Do not attach anything to or lean anythingagainst areas such as the dashboard, steer-ing wheel pad or lower portion of theinstrument panel.These items can become projectiles whenSRS driver, front passenger and knee air-bags deploy.

●Do not attach anything to areas such as thedoor, windshield glass, side door glass,front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assistgrip.

87


1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications with-out consulting your Lexus dealer.The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death orserious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrumentpanel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof siderails

●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupantcompartment

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo baretc.)

●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players

●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

88


Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat andactivates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.

SRS warning lightFront passenger’s seat belt reminder lightAIR BAG OFF indicator lightAIR BAG ON indicator light


Without navigation system

89


1

Before driving

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult*1

■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4

Indicator/warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG ON

SRS warning light Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Activated

Side airbag on the right side passenger seats

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger sideFront passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner



AIR BAG OFF*5

SRS warning light Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2

Devices

Front passenger airbagDeactivatedSide airbag on the right side

passenger seatsCurtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated

Front passenger knee airbag DeactivatedFront passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated

90


■ Unoccupied

■ There is a malfunction in the system

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smalleradult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits inthe front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as anadult depending on his/her physique or posture.



Not illuminated

SRS warning lightOff

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Devices



Front passenger knee airbagDeactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner



AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light OnFront passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off

Devices



Front passenger knee airbag DeactivatedFront passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated

91


1

Before driving

*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 93)

*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as forinstalling the child restraint system properly. (P. 97)

CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classifica-tion system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Wear the seat belt properly.

●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into thebuckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

●Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using theseat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicatorlight is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making surethe AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extenderwhile the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag,side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may notactivate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of colli-sion.

●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet onthe front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press onthe seatback with their legs.

●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. Thismay cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicatesthat the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If theseatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it doesnot touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possiblewhen the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen theeffectiveness of the seat belt system.

92


CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illu-minated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit upstraight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn cor-rectly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the pas-senger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passengerseat fully rearward.

●When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on thefront passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seatin the proper order. (P. 97)

●Do not modify or remove the front seats.

●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection sys-tem. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-backs.

●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seatcushion surface.

●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

93

1


Before driving

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is muchsafer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-ate to the age and size of the child.

● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the childrestraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 97)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types accordingto the age and size of the child.

Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of the Canada and all 50 states of the USA now require the use ofchild restraint systems.

94


Forward facing Convertible seat

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomeslarge enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat anduse the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 50)

95


1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child mustbe properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending onthe age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the wind-shield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms tothe size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, thechild is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat evenif AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, theforce of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or seri-ous injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on thefront passenger seat.

●A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on thefront passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system thatrequires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat sincethere is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seat-back as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible evenif AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may bekilled or seriously injured.

●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on thefront or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the childrestraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or otherpassengers in the event of collision.

●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against thedoor or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side air-bags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the childrestraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbagsinflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

96


CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by thechild restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is notsecured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of asudden stop or accident.

■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution

Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the beltbecomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt outleading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cutthe belt.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle orstore it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

97

1


Before driving

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmlysecure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH anchorsor a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not com-patible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are providedfor the outside rear seats. (But-tons displaying the location ofthe anchors are attached to theseats.)

Seat belts equipped with a childrestraint locking mechanism(ALR/ELR belts except driver’sseat belt) (P. 50)

Anchor bracket (for top tetherstrap)

Anchor brackets are providedfor all rear seats.

98


Installation with LATCH system

Type A

Widen the gap betweenthe seat cushion and seat-back slightly.Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the LATCHanchorages.If the child restraint has atop tether strap, the toptether strap should belatched onto the top tetherstrap anchor.

For owners in Canada:A symbol on a child restraint sys-tem indicates the presence of alower connector system.

Canada only

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

99


1

Before driving

Type B

Widen the gap betweenthe seat cushion and seat-back slightly.Latch the buckles onto theLATCH anchors. If the child restraint has atop tether strap, the toptether strap should belatched onto the top tetherstrap anchor.

For owners in Canada:A symbol on a child restraint sys-tem indicates the presence of alower connector system.Canada only

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

100


Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat

Place the child seat on the rearseat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the childseat and insert the plate into thebuckle. Make sure that the belt isnot twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt andthen allow it to retract slightly inorder to activate the ALR lockmode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt toretract only.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

101


1

Before driving

While pushing the child seat downinto the rear seat, allow the shoul-der belt to retract until the childseat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt hasretracted to a point where there isno slack in the belt, pull the belt tocheck that it cannot be extended.

■ Forward facing Convertible seat

Place the child seat on the seatfacing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the childseat and insert the plate into thebuckle. Make sure that the belt isnot twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt andthen allow it to retract slightly intothe ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt toretract only.

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

102


While pushing the child seat intothe rear seat, allow the shoulderbelt to retract until the child seat issecurely in place.

After the shoulder belt hasretracted to a point where there isno slack in the belt, pull the belt tocheck that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strapshould be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

■ Booster seat

Place the booster seat on the seatfacing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the booster seat. Fitthe seat belt to the booster seataccording to the manufacturer'sinstructions and insert the plateinto the buckle. Make sure that thebelt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is cor-rectly positioned over the child'sshoulder, and that the lap belt is aslow as possible. (P. 50)

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

103


1

Before driving

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release buttonand fully retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

Secure the child restraint using aseat belt or a lower anchors, andlock the head restraint in place atthe lowest position.

Open the anchor bracket cover,latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top tetherstrap.

Make sure the top tether strap issecurely latched.

STEP 1

STEP 2

104


■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationscan be used.This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION

■ When installing a booster seat

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lockmode: (P. 52) ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort tothe child.

105


1

Before driving

CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fixthe child restraint system securely in place.If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passen-gers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept awayfrom the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing todo so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking.

●Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

●Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.

●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-turer.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the childrestraint system and prevents it from beingattached correctly, attach the child restraintsystem to the right-hand rear seat.

●Only put a forward facing or booster childseat on the front seat when unavoidable.When installing a forward facing orbooster child seat on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possibleeven if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illu-minated. Failing to do so may result indeath or serious injury if the airbags deploy(inflate).

106


CAUTION

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat beltwill not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seriousinjury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects aroundthe anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make surethe child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or seriousinjury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

When driving 2

107


Driving the vehicle................. 108

Engine (ignition) switch .......... 116

Automatic Transmission......... 119

Turn signal lever ....................... 122

Parking brake ........................... 123

Horn ............................................ 124


Gauges and meters ................ 125

Indicators and warning lights ......................................... 127

Multi-information display ...... 131


Headlight switch...................... 135

Fog light switch ........................ 138

Windshield wipers and washer ..................................... 139


Cruise control.......................... 143

Dynamic radar cruise control ..................................... 146

Intuitive parking assist........... 155

Driving assist systems.............. 161

PCS (Pre-Collision System) ................................... 164


Cargo and luggage ................ 168

Vehicle load limits ..................... 171

Winter driving tips ................... 172

Trailer towing ........................... 178

Dinghy towing.......................... 185

108


Driving the vehicle

Starting on a steep uphill

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake.

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■ Starting the engine (P. 117)

■ DrivingWith the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

(P. 119)Release the parking brake. (P. 123)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress theaccelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■ StoppingWith the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. If necessary, set the parking brake. When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift theshift lever to P or N. (P. 119)

■ Parking the vehicleWith the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. Set the parking brake. (P. 123) Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 119) Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine. Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key onyour person.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

109


2

When driving

■ Driving in the rain

●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windowsmay become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especiallyslippery.

●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, becausethere may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventingthe steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended toobserve:

●For the first 200 miles (300 km):Avoid sudden stops.

●For the first 600 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.• Avoid sudden acceleration.• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake sys-tem needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bed-ding down.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of thecorrect fuel. (P. 424)

■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound comingfrom under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporationleakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

110


CAUTION

■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and acceleratorpedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal willresult in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result indeath or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty inoperating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicleonly slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals prop-erly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedalusing your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an acci-dent.

●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

●Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, orroll forward while the shift lever is in R.Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering perfor-mance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and checkthat the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driverdrowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Havethe vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

●Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicleis moving.Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may resultin a loss of vehicle control.

●Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to anaccident.

111


2

When driving

CAUTION

●Do not turn the engine off while driving. The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if theengine is not running.

●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down asteep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effec-tiveness. (P. 119)

●When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake toprevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.

●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outsiderear view mirrors while driving.Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that mayresult in death or serious injury.

●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies arenot outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, donot drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capabilitytires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control andpossible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires onyour vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduceyour ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

●Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shiftingor down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure thatthe brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes fromfunctioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioningproperly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause anaccident and result in death or serious injury.

112


CAUTION

■ When the vehicle is stopped

●Do not race the engine.If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenlyand unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space andcheck that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

●Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent anaccident caused by the vehicle moving.

■ When the vehicle is parked

●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-cle when it is in the sun.Failure to do so may result in the following.

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic

material of eye glasses to deform or crack.• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of

the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical com-ponents.

●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lockthe vehicle.Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately afterturning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.

●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it issnowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a seri-ous health hazard.

113


2

When driving

CAUTION

■ Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odor-less. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, suchas a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead todeath or a serious health hazard.

●The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused bycorrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehi-cle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allowexhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever ordepress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engineoverheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaustgases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking the vehicle

●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side ofthe vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake maynot securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehiclesclosely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal thanusual. Braking distance may also increase.

●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systemsfails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressedmore firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixedimmediately.

114


NOTICE

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals togetherto hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or thevehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a longtime. Doing so may damage the power steering pump

●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/orthat of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

●The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 400)

115


2

When driving

NOTICE

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause thefollowing serious damage to the vehicle.

●Engine stalling

●Short in electrical components

●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure tohave your Lexus dealer check the following.

●Brake function

●Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, transaxle fluid, etc.

●Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible) andthe function of all joints, bearings, etc.

116


Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key onyour person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switchmodes.

■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modeModes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each timethe switch is pressed.)

OFF*

Emergency flashers can beused.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical componentssuch as the audio system can beused.

The “ENGINE START STOP”switch indicator turns amber.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components canbe used.

The “ENGINE START STOP”switch indicator turns amber.

*: The engine cannot be turned offunless the shift lever is in P.

117


2

When driving

■ If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 70)

■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer immediately.

■ Auto power OFF function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift leverin P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.

■ Starting the engineCheck that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.

Press the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch.

The engine can be started fromany mode.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

118



P. 28

■ When the electronic key battery is discharged

P. 342


P. 26

■ Note for the entry function

P. 29

CAUTION

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelera-tor pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push andhold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except inan emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead toan unexpected accident.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON mode for long periods without the engine running.

■ When starting the engine

●Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the enginechecked immediately.

119


2

When driving

Automatic Transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

While the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch isin IGNITION ONmode, depress the brakepedal and move the shiftlever.

■ Shift position uses

*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the Dposition for normal driving.

*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possiblegear ranges, controls engine braking forces.

Shift position Function

P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

R Reversing

N Neutral

D Normal driving*1

S S mode driving*2 (P. 120)

120


Changing shift ranges in S mode

Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.

UpshiftingDownshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according tovehicle speed. However, depending on the driving condition, the initialshift range may be set to 3 when AI-SHIFT control is being performed.(P. 121)

■ Shift ranges and their functions

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shiftrange.

Shift range Function

6Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.





1 Setting the gear at 1.

121


2

When driving

■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible evenwhen the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)

■ When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control sys-tem

The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4.(P. 143, 146)

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 409

■ If the indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have thevehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)

■ AI-SHIFT (Artificial Intelligence Shift)

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to thedriver performance and driving conditions.The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shift-ing the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

122


Turn signal lever

■ Turn signals can be operated when


■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

Right turnLeft turnMove and hold the lever part-way to signal a lane change

The right hand signal will flashuntil you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever part-way to signal a lane change

The left hand signal will flashuntil you release the lever.

123


2

When driving

Parking brake

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components over-heating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

Sets the parking brake*(Depressing the pedal againreleases the parking brake.)

*: Fully depress the parking brakepedal with your left foot whiledepressing the brake pedal withyour right foot.

Canada USA

124


Horn

To sound the horn, press on orclose to the mark.

125

2

When driving


Gauges and meters

The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display maydiffer depending on the model/type.

The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

TachometerDisplays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Multi-information displayP. 131

SpeedometerDisplays the vehicle speed.

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset buttonSwitches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holdingthe button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.

Fuel gaugeDisplays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

126


Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

BrighterDarker

When the headlight switch isturned to ON, the brightness willbe reduced slightly unless the con-trol dial is turned fully up.

Odometer and trip meter● Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

● Trip meterDisplays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter waslast reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display differ-ent distances independently.

Engine coolant temperature gaugeDisplays the engine coolant temperature.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-cates the maximum engine speed.

●The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). Inthis case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine afterit has cooled completely. (P. 416)

127


2

When driving

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and centerpanel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display maydiffer depending on the model/type.

128


Center panel (without navigation system)

Center panel (with navigation system)

129


2

When driving

■ IndicatorsThe indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehi-cle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator (P. 122)

Cruise control indicator (P. 143)

Headlight high beam indi-cator (P. 135)

(if equipped)

AFS OFF indicator light(P. 136)

(USA)

Headlight indicator (P. 135) Slip indicator (P. 161)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator(P. 135)

(without navigation system)

SRS airbag on-off indica-tor (P. 88)

Front fog light indicator(P. 138)

(with navi-gation sys-tem)

SRS airbag on-off indica-tor (P. 88)

Shift position and shift range indica-tors (P. 119)

*

*

*

*

130


CAUTION

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning lights notcome on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are notavailable to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or seriousinjury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

■ Warning lightsWarning lights inform the driver of malfunctions or suspected prob-lem in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 375)

*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turnedto IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

(USA) (Canada) (USA) (Canada)

(USA) (Canada) (if equipped) (without navigation

system)

(with naviga-tion system)

* * * * * *

* * * * *

131


2

When driving


The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, including the current outside air temperature.

● Trip information (P. 132)

Displays driving range, fuel con-sumption and other cruisingrelated information.

● Intuitive parking assist dis-play (if equipped)

(P. 155)

Automatically displayed whenusing intuitive parking assist.

● Dynamic radar cruise con-trol display (if equipped)

(P. 146)

Automatically displayed whenusing dynamic radar cruise con-trol.

● Warning messages(P. 386)

Automatically displayed when amalfunction occurs in one of thevehicle’s systems.

132


Trip information

Type A

Display items can be switched bypushing the DISP switch.

Type B

■ Outside temperature

Displays the outside air temperature.

The temperature range that can be displayed in the fol-lowing range.

USA: from -40 to 122 °FCanada: from -40 to 50 °C

133


2

When driving

■ Driving range

■ Average fuel consumption

■ Average fuel consumption after refueling

■ Current fuel consumption

■ Average vehicle speed

Displays the estimated maximum distance that canbe driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your averagefuel consumption. As a result, the actual distancethat can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to thetank, the display may not be updated.

Displays the average fuel consumption since thefunction was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the DISP switchfor longer than one second when the average fuel con-sumption is displayed.

Displays the average fuel consumption since thevehicle was last refueled.

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Displays the average vehicle speed since the enginewas started or the function was reset.

134


■ Elapsed time

Displays the elapsed time since the engine wasstarted.

■ System check display

After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is

complete, is displayed before returning to the normal screen.

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, orthe display may take longer than normal to change.

●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of agarage, tunnel, etc.)

NOTICE

■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal informa-tion display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor mayrespond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

135

2

When driving


Headlight switch

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push thelever forward to turn on the highbeams.

Pull the lever back to the centerposition to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turnon the high beams.

Release to turn them off. You canflash the high beams with the head-lights on or off.

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

The side marker, parking,tail, license plate andinstrument panel lightsturn on.

The headlights and alllights listed above turnon. The headlights and park-ing lights turn on and offautomatically.(When the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch isin IGNITION ONmode)

USA Canada

136


AFS (vehicles with discharge headlights)

AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System) improves visibility at intersectionsand on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of light axis of theheadlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire anglethat are controlled by steering input.

Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

■ Deactivating AFS

Turn the switch OFF to deactivateAFS.

OFFON

■ Daytime running light system

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automati-cally (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brakeis released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if anobject is placed on the sensor, or anythingthat blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-shield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detectingthe level of ambient light and may cause theautomatic headlight control system to mal-function.

137


2

When driving

■ Automatic light off system

●When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 secondsafter all doors are closed with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch switched toACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off immediately ifthe button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)

●When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turnedOFF and driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switchOFF once and then back to the or position.

■ Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number ofpassengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights donot interfere with other road users.

■ If the indicator flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights)

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.


Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P.447)

NOTICE


Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

138


Fog light switch

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rainor fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.

To turn the front fog lights offTo turn the front fog lights on

139


2

When driving

Windshield wipers and washer

■ Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped)When intermittent wiper operation is selected, wiper intervals canbe adjusted.

Intermittent windshield wiperoperationLow speed windshield wiperoperationHigh speed windshield wiperoperationTemporary operation

Increases the intermittentwindshield wiper frequencyDecreases the intermittentwindshield wiper frequency

140


Wash/wipe operation

Wipers operate automatically.

■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)With AUTO selected, the wipers will operate automatically whenthe sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjustswiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Rain-sensing windshieldwiper operationLow speed windshield wiperoperationHigh speed windshield wiperoperationTemporary operation

141


2

When driving

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when


■ Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)

■ AUTO mode

If the wiper switch is turned to AUTO position while the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that AUTOmode is activated.

Sensor sensitivity (high)Sensor sensitivity (low)

Wash/wipe operation

Wipers operate automatically.(With AUTO selected, afteroperating several times, the wip-ers operate one more time aftera short delay to prevent drip-ping.)

The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

142


■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-shield washer fluid reservoir.

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehiclesequipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or thewindshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or any-thing else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward youand held continually.

143

2

When driving


Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelera-tor.

■ Set the vehicle speed

Turn the ON-OFF button ON.

Push the button once more todeactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate to thedesired speed and press thelever down to set the cruisecontrol speed.

■ Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speedDecrease speed

Hold the lever until the desiredspeed setting is obtained.

STEP 1

STEP 2

: If equipped

144


■ Fine adjustment of the set speed

Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/h]) can be madeby lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.

■ Cruise control can be set when

●The shift lever is in the D or 4, 5, or 6 range of S.

●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally.

■ Automatic cruise control cancellation

The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.

●Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehiclespeedAt this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

●Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h)

●VSC is activated

■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration

Cancel

Push the lever towards you tocancel cruise control.

The speed setting is also can-celed when the brakes areapplied.

Resume

To resume cruise control andreturn to the set speed, push thelever up.

145


2

When driving

■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Turn the ON-OFF button off once, and then reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediatelyafter being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Havethe vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious orfatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

●On roads with sharp bends

●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

●On steep hills

●On winding roads

●When towing a trailer

146


Dynamic radar cruise control

Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise controlwith a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or deceleratesin order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

■ Select cruise mode

Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance control mode

Turn the ON-OFF buttonON.

Push the button once more todeactivate.

Selecting conventional con-stant speed control mode

Turn the ON-OFF buttonON.

Push the button once more todeactivate.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-trol mode is always reset whenthe “ENGINE START STOP”switch is switched to IGNITIONON mode.

Switch to constant speedcontrol mode.(push and hold for approxi-mately one second)

: If equipped

147


2

When driving

■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode

Accelerate or decelerate thevehicle to the desired speed andpress the lever down to set.

■ Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speedDecrease speed

To change the set speed, oper-ate the lever until the desired setspeed is displayed

Fine Adjustment (1 mph incre-ments)

Momentarily move lever indesired direction and release

Coarse adjustment (5 mphincrements)

HOLD the lever in the desireddirection. Coarse adjustmentwill continue to change the setspeed approximately 5 mph persecond until the lever isreleased.

148


■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting

Cancel

Push the lever towards you tocancel cruise control.

The setting is also canceledwhen the brakes are applied.

Resume

To resume cruise control andreturn to the set speed, push thelever up.

■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Each push of the switch changesthe vehicle-to-vehicle distance

LongMediumShort

The vehicle-to-vehicle distanceis automatically set to the longmode when the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch isswitched to IGNITION ONmode.

A mark will be displayed to indi-cate the presence of the vehicleif a vehicle is running ahead ofyou.

Precedingvehicle mark

149


2

When driving

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicleswithin 328 ft. (100 m) ahead and to judge the distance between yourvehicle and those vehicles.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long down-hill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehiclesahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h) The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distanceswitch.

Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is drivingslower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the sys-tem automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction invehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tonewarns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent yourvehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.

150


Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slowerthan the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) andthe vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in thespeed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles drivingslower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowlyaccelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns tofixed speed cruising.

■ Fine adjustment of the set speed

Adjustment of the set speed by the following speed can be made by lightly pressingthe lever up or down and releasing it.

In the constant speed control mode: Approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h)In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

USA: Approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)Canada:Approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)

■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers

Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction orto alert you to the need for caution while driving. (P. 386)

■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when

●The shift lever is in D or the 4, 5 or 6 range of S.

●Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

■ Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally.

151


2

When driving

■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the follow-ing situations.

●Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)

●VSC is activated

●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.*●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.**: Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the ON-OFF

button on again.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any otherreason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control

The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.

●Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehiclespeedAt this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

●Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)

●VSC is activated

■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspondto a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long Approximately 210 ft. (65 m)

Medium Approximately 150 ft. (45 m)

Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

152


■ Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicledistance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plasticobjects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

■ Certification

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQDNMWR001

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cmbetween the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter

Grille cover

Radar sensor

153


2

When driving


Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is notappropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicleand vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.

■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious orfatal accident.

● In heavy traffic

●On roads with sharp bends

●On winding roads

●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow.

●Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

●At entrances to expressways

●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensorsfrom functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)

●Where buzzer can be heard often

●When towing a trailer

154


CAUTION

■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are infront of you.As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the prox-imity alarm (P. 386) will not be activated, and an accident may result.

●Vehicles that cut in suddenly

●Vehicles traveling at low speeds

●Vehicles that are not moving

●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not functioncorrectly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor maynot be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.

●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-ing of the sensor

●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)

●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly

Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sen-sor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.

●Stick or attach anything to them

●Leave them dirty

●Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks

●Modify or paint them

●Replace them with non-genuine parts

155


2

When driving

Intuitive parking assist

The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated viathe multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking ormaneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area whenusing this system.

For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.

■ Types of sensors

Front corner sensorsRear corner sensorsBack sensors

■ Multi-information display (P. 131)

Front corner sensor opera-tionRear corner sensor operationBack sensor operation

: If equipped

156


The display and buzzer system

■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approxi-mately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.

Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) to1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obsta-cle Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)to 0.8 ft. (25 cm) from theobstacle Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm)of the obstacle

■ Intuitive parking assist switch

ON/OFF

When ON, an indicator on theswitch comes on to inform thedriver that the function is opera-tional.

157


2

When driving

■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approxi-mately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) from theobstacleApproximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacleApproximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to1.2 ft. (35 cm) from the obstacleFlashing: Within 1.2 ft. (35 cm)of the obstacle

■ Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are oper-ating.

● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obsta-cle, the buzzer sounds continuously.

• Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)• Back sensors: Approximately 1.2 ft. (35 cm)

● When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, thebuzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.

● If multiple obstacles are detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) in front andbehind the vehicle at the same time, the warning buzzer will changein the following manner:

• If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detectednear a different area of the vehicle, the warning buzzer will sound6 beeps then one continuous beep.

• If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detectedwithin 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warn-ing buzzer will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.

158


Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

The diagram shows the detectionrange of the sensors. Note that thesensors cannot detect obstaclesthat are extremely close to thevehicle.

The range of the sensors maychange depending on the shape ofthe object etc.

159


2

When driving

■ Sensor detection information

●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect theability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where thismay occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.• The sensor is frozen.• The sensor is covered in any way.• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,

air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.• Towing eyelets are installed.• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of theirshapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than theyare.

●The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-lar attention to the following obstacles.

• Wires, fences, ropes etc. • Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves• Sharply-angled objects• Low obstacles• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your

vehicle

160


■ When the display flashes and a message is displayed

P. 386

■ Certification


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.


This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.


Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 447)

CAUTION

■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possi-bly cause an accident.

●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

●Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

NOTICE

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

161


2

When driving

Driving assist systems

When the VSC and TRAC systems are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slip-ping, or if the front wheels spin, theslip indicator light flashes to indi-cate that the VSC and TRAC sys-tems have been engaged.

A buzzer (intermittent) sounds toindicate that VSC is operating.

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systemsoperate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be reliedupon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or ifthe brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

■ Brake assistGenerates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal isdepressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning onslippery road surfaces.

■ TRAC (Traction Control) Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning whenstarting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)P. 165

162


■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems

●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine isstarted or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate thata malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

CAUTION

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death orserious injury:

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.

●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-tions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.

●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

●When driving with tire chains

●When driving over bumps in the road

●When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery roadsurfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

163


2

When driving

CAUTION

■ When the slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds

This situation occurs immediately while VSC is activated. Always drive carefully.Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indica-tor light flashes and a buzzer sounds.

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total loadcapacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tirepressure level.

The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted onthe vehicle.Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

164


PCS (Pre-Collision System)

Radar sensor

Detects vehicles or other obsta-cles on or near the road ahead anddetermines whether a collision isimminent based on the position,speed, and heading of the obsta-cles.

Grille coverRadar sensor

Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automaticallyengaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle dam-age when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.

■ Pre-collision seat belts The front seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the preten-sioner is increased (P. 51), to provide even greater constraining force toprotect the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skid-ding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected.

■ Pre-collision brake assist Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal isdepressed.

■ Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occa-sions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,trees, or snowdrifts.

: If equipped

165


2

When driving

■ The pre-collision system is operational when

●Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)

• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming

vehicle exceeds 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

●Seat belts (linked to brake operation)

• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).• 15The system detects sudden braking or skidding.• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

●Brake assist

• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is

greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).• The brake pedal is depressed.

■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision

●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve

●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve

●When driving over a narrow iron bridge

●When there is a metal object on the road surface

●When driving on an uneven road surface

●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn

●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front

When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possi-bility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a forcegreater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop thevehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 375, 386)

166


■ Certification


FCC ID: HYQDNMWR001

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cmbetween the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter


Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation of the device.

167


2

When driving

CAUTION

■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.

●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damagethem.

●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If thesensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the areainspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.

●Do not disassemble the sensor.

●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surroundingarea.

■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observeyour surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.

168


Cargo and luggage

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity.

For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (1505) = 650lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargocapacity and load.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sureall items are secured in place.

● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

169


2

When driving

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehi-cle. (P. 178)

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacityTotal load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are ridingin your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 900 lb. (410 kg), theavailable amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:

900 lb. — 366 lb. = 534 lb. (410 kg —166 kg = 244 kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as fol-lows:

534 lb. — 388 lb. = 146 lb. (244 kg — 176 kg = 68 kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occu-pants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in thenumber of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (com-bined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you mustreduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. (P. 171)

170


CAUTION

■ Storage precautions

●Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle duringsudden braking or in an accident.

●Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp accelera-tion or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accidentthey may injure the vehicle occupants.

●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-one during an accident or sudden braking.

■ Capacity and distribution

●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

●Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the totalload capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control whichmay cause death or serious injury.

171


2

When driving

Vehicle load limits

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 334)

CAUTION

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and brakingability, resulting in an accident.

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towingcapacity and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: 900 lb. (410 kg) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo andluggage.

■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

■ Towing capacity: 1000 lb. (450 kg)

■ Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight andthe number of occupants.

172


Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving thevehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to theprevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-

tures.

• Engine oil• Engine coolant• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity ofbattery electrolyte.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set oftire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains matchthe size of the tires.

● Tire inflation pressure falls in winter as the outside temperaturefalls. Add 2.9 to 4.3 psi (20 to 30 kPa, 0.2 to 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)to the standard tire inflation pressure.

173


2

When driving

■ Before driving the vehiclePerform the following according to the driving conditions.

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is fro-zen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipeaway the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents infront of the windshield.

● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow thatmay have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

■ When driving the vehicleAccelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitableto road conditions.

■ When parking the vehiclePark the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting theparking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it frombeing released.

174


Selecting snow chains

Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chainsize is regulated for each tire sizes.

Side chain

0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter1.18 in. [30 mm] in length0.39 in. [10 mm] in width

Cross chain

0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter0.98 in. [25 mm] in length0.55 in. [14 mm] in width

Regulations on the use of snow chains

● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to locationand type of road. Always check local regulations before installingchains.

● Install the chains on the front tires.

● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

175


2

When driving

Shifting the windshield wiper position

You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow oricy condition etc.)

Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiperposition.

To rest positionRaise the wiper in line with thewindshield.

You can stand the wipers up for therest position.

*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)

To retract positionLower the wipers by pressing onthe upper part of the hook section.

176


■ Snow chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear tires.

● Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains afterdriving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanyinginstructions.

CAUTION

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or seriousinjury.

●Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tiresbeing used.

●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■ Driving with snow chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and maycause death or serious injury.

●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehiclehandling.

●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control ismaintained.

177


2

When driving

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legiti-mate tire retailers.This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation ofthe tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly whentire chains are fitted.

178


Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle, thustowing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, brak-ing, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of oth-ers, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.

Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towinga trailer for commercial purposes

■ Weight limitsConfirm the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axleweight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

■ Gross vehicle weightThe gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The grossvehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also included is theweight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.

■ Gross axle weightThe load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.

Certification label

179


2

When driving

Towing a trailer

Consult your Lexus dealer for further information on additional require-ments such as a towing kits, etc.

■ Trailer tongue loadThe trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum100 lb. (45 kg). (Tongue load / Total trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with plat-form scales found at a highway weighing stations, building supplycompany, trucking company, junk yards, etc.

Total trailer weightTongue load

180


■ Before towing

●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 334)

●Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recom-mendation.

●All trailer lights work to be legal.

●Confirm all lights work each time you connect them.

●Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongueload, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

●Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded.

●Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial orlocal regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towingpurposes.

■ Break-in schedule

Lexus recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any newpower train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) totow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.

■ Maintenance

● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Sup-plement/ Scheduled Maintenance”.)

●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

CAUTION

■ To avoid accident or injury

●The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus the weight of cargo) must not exceed1000 lb. (450 kg).

●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axleweight and trailer tongue load capacities.

●Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About 60% ofthe load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining 40% in therear.

181


2

When driving

CAUTION

■ Hitches

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitchmanufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing ahigher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer hitch.

● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should be consulted.

●Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.

●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.

●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removingthe hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any sub-stances into the vehicle.

■ When towing a trailer

●Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle'sbraking effectiveness.

●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both thetrailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there isdanger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

●Do not use cruise control/dynamic radar cruise control.Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious orfatal accident.

NOTICE

■ When installing a trailer hitch

●Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install thetrailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

●Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing,wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

■ Brakes

Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal andstate/provincial regulations.

182


Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The three maincauses of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed andimproper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing.

● Before starting out, check the trailer’s lights and the vehicle-trailerconnections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in anarea away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of thevehicle.

● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Gripthe bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left tomove the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move thetrailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without atrailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someoneguide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.

● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

NOTICE

■ Safety chain

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer.Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailertongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that itbecomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation proce-dure, ask your Lexus dealer.

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Directly splicing may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunc-tion.

183


2

When driving

● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and lossof control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making aturn.

● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than thevehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making alarger than normal turning radius.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of yourvehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to preparefor being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehi-cle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel,reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead.Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with thesteering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of yourtrailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

● In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical chargingperformance, do not use overdrive. Transmission shift range positionmust be in 4, in the S mode.

● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may over-heat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving upa long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indi-cates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use),pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. See “If you vehicleoverheats”. (P. 416)

184


● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailerwheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put thetransmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do soonly after performing the following:

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle andtrailer wheels.When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowlyuntil the blocks absorb the load.Apply the parking brake firmly.Shift into P and turn off the engine.

● When restarting after parking on a slope:

With the transmission in the P position, start the engine. Be sureto keep the brake pedal pressed.Shift into 3, 2, 1, or the R position (if reversing).Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull orback away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

■ To avoid an accident

●Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or posted towing speed limit, whichever islower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increasesas speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause loss of control.

●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Donot make sudden downshifts.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

185


2

When driving

Dinghy towing

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on theground) behind a motor home.

186


Interior features 3

187


Automatic air conditioning system ..................................... 188

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ............................... 195

3-2. Using the audio systemAudio system type................... 196Using the radio......................... 198Using the CD player ............ 205Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs.............................. 211Optimal use of the audio

system ...................................... 219Using the AUX adapter ....... 222Using the steering wheel

audio switches ..................... 223


Hands-free phone system features (for cellular phone) ............. 225

Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) ............ 228

Making a phone call .............. 236Setting a cellular phone ....... 240Security and system setup... 244Using the phone book........... 247

3-4. Using the interior lightsInterior lights list .................... 253• Interior lights ........................ 255• Personal lights ..................... 255

3-5. Using the storage featuresList of storage features......... 256• Glove box.............................. 256• Console box ......................... 257• Overhead console.............. 259• Cup holders .......................... 260• Auxiliary box ........................ 262

3-6. Other interior featuresSun visors ................................. 263Vanity mirror ........................... 264Clock......................................... 265Ashtray ..................................... 266Cigarette lighter..................... 267Power outlet ............................ 268Seat heaters ............................ 269Seat heaters and

ventilators ............................... 271Armrest .................................... 273Rear sunshade ......................... 274Extended trunk........................ 276Floor mat ................................... 277Trunk features ......................... 278Garage door opener ............ 280Compass .................................. 286

188


Automatic air conditioning system

Using the automatic mode

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outletsand fan speed are automatically adjusted according to thetemperature setting.

Press to switch to automatic mode.

Automatically switches between outside air and recirculatedair modes.

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tempera-ture setting.

With navigation systemOwners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.


Automatic mode

Driver’s side temperature setting display

Changes the air outlets used

Off

Fan speed

Airflow display

Fan speed display

Passenger’s side temperature setting display

Driver's side temperature control

Air conditioning ON/OFF switch

Outside air or recirculated air mode

Front windshield defogger

Passenger’s side temperature control

Dual operation switch

STEP 1

STEP 2

189


3

Interior features

Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-

perature on the switch.

The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set sepa-rately.

Adjusting the settings

■ Adjusting the temperature settingPress to increase the temperature and to decrease the tempera-

ture on the switch.

Press (increase) or (decrease) on the switch to separately adjust

the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same set-

ting (simultaneous mode).

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneousmodes each time is pressed.

■ Adjusting the fan speed

Press (increase) or (decrease) on .

Press to turn the fan off.

STEP 3

190


■ Changing the air outlets

Press or on the switch.

The air outlets switch each time theswitch is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.Air flows to the upper body andfeet.Air flows to the feet.Air flows to the feet and thefront windshield defogger oper-ates.

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle),AUTO and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes eachtime the switch is pressed.

When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioningsystem operates automatically.

191


3

Interior features

Defogging the front windshield

Defogging

The air conditioning system controloperates automatically.

Recirculated air mode will auto-matically switch to outside airmode. It is not possible to return torecirculated air mode when theswitch is on.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode

Press for 2 or more sec-onds.

Press (increase) or (decrease)

on the switch.

From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can beset.

STEP 1

STEP 2

192


Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Center outletsDirect air flow to the left or right,up or down

Front outlets (right and left side)Direct air flow to the left or right,up or downTurn the knob right to open thevent and left to close the vent

Rear outletsDirect air flow to the left or right,up or downTurn the knob up to open thevent and down to close the vent

193


3

Interior features

■ Using the automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting andambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

●The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolesttemperature setting is selected in summer.

● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warmor cool air is ready to flow.

●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for anextended period.

■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode in sit-uations where the windows need to be defogged.

■ Outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C).

The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.

■ When the indicator light on flashes

Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on oncemore. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator lightcontinues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by yourLexus dealer.

■ Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-matically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield cancause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

194


NOTICE


Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary whenthe engine is stopped.

195


3

Interior features

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

CAUTION

■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hotand burn you.

These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.


ON/OFF

The defoggers will automaticallyturn off after 15 to 60 minutes.The operation time changesaccording to the ambient tem-perature and vehicle speed.


ON/OFF

The defoggers will automaticallyturn off after 15 to 60 minutes.The operation time changesaccording to the ambient tem-perature and vehicle speed.

196


Audio system type

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone isbeing used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

With navigation systemOwners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer tothe “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation systemCD player with changer and AM/FM radio

Title Page

Using the radio P. 198

Using the CD player P. 205

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 211

Optimal use of the audio system P. 219

Using the AUX adapter P. 222

Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 223

197


3

Interior features

CAUTION

■ For vehicles sold in USA and Canada

●Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’sauthority to operate this device.

●Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from thesurface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remaininside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter anyof its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other thanthose specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE


Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

198


Using the radio

Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)

Search for desired stations by turning the or pressing or

on .

Press and hold the switch (from to ) the station is to beset to, and you hear a beep.

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)

■ Scanning the preset radio stations

Press and hold until you hear a beep.Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the switch once again.

Seeking any traffic program station

Stationselector Displays radio text messages

Power Volume

Scans for receivable stations

Seeking the frequency Changing the program types

Adjusting the frequency (AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode)

AMSAT/FM mode buttons

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

199


3

Interior features

■ Scanning all radio stations within rangePress .All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the switch once again.

RDS (Radio Data System)

This feature allows your radio to receive station identification informationand program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations whichbroadcast this information.

■ Receiving RDS broadcasts

Press or on during FM reception.

The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.

● ROCK

● EASY LIS (Easy listening)

● CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

● R & B (Rhythm and Blues)

● INFORM (Information)

● RELIGION

● MISC (Miscellaneous)

● ALERT (Emergency messages)

If the system receives no RDS stations, NO PTY appears on the display.

Press , or or on .

The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.

■ Displaying radio station namesPress .

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

200


■ Displaying radio text messagesPress twice.

If MSG shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.

If the text continues past the end of the display, is displayed. Press andhold until you hear a beep.

XM® Satellite Radio (If equipped)

■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio

Press and hold until SAT shows in the display.

The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.AM SAT1 SAT2 SAT3

Turn to select the desired channel in the all categories or

press or on to select the desired channel in

the current category.

■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presetsSelect the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to(from to ), and you hear a beep.

■ Changing the channel category

Press or on the switch.

■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels● Scanning channels in the current category

Press .When the desired channel is reached, press the switchagain.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

201


3

Interior features

● Scanning preset channels

Press and hold until you hear a beep.When the desired channel is reached, press the switchagain.

■ Displaying text informationPress .

The display will show up to 10 characters.

The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.

● CH NAME

● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)

● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)

● CH NUMBER

STEP 1

STEP 2

202


■ When the battery is disconnected

Stations presets are erased.

■ Reception sensitivity

●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continuallychanging position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surroundingobjects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radioreception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to theantenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ XM® Satellite Radio

An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts pro-vided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguousstates and 10 Canadian provinces.

●XM® subscriptionsFor detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:U.S.A. Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.Canada Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

●Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-

lem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number

will appear.

●Satellite tunerThe tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompany-ing Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

*: Terms and services provided by XM® Satellite Radio are subject to change with-out notice.

203


3

Interior features

■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referto the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

ANTENNA

The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surround-ing antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.

UPDATING

You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscrip-tion information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to lis-ten to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio.

NO SIGNALThe XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stron-ger signal.

LOADINGThe unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIRThe channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-gramming. Select another channel.

-----There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

204


Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class Bdigital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed toprovide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interferencewill not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-aged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:

●Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.

● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

---

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-ous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change auto-matically, select another channel.

205


3

Interior features

Using the CD player

Loading CDs

■ Loading a CDPush .WAIT is shown on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber togreen.The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.

■ Loading multiple CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep.WAIT is shown on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber togreen.The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.

The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

Power Volume

Selecting a track

CD ejectPlayback

Search playback

CD insert

Selecting a CD

Random playback

Repeat play

Displays text message

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

206


Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns fromamber to green again.Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.

To stop the operation, press .

Ejecting CDs

■ Ejecting a CD

To select the CD to be ejected,

press or on .

The number of the CD selected isshown on the display.

Press and remove the CD.

■ Ejecting all the CDsPress and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.

Selecting, fast-forwarding, rewinding, and scanning tracks

■ Selecting a track

Press to move up and to move down using until the

desired track number is displayed.

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on .

■ Scanning a CDPress .The first ten seconds of each track will be played.

Press the switch again when the desired track is reached.

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

207


3

Interior features

Selecting a CD

■ To select a CD to play

To select the desired CD, press or on .

■ To scan loaded CDsPress and hold until you hear a beep.The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.

Press the switch again when the desired CD is reached.

Repeat play

■ To repeat a trackPress (RPT).

■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CDPress and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Random playback

■ Current CDPress (RAND).

Tracks are played in random order until random playback is canceled.

■ All CDsPress and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the switch ispressed once more.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./Elapsed time CD title Track name.

STEP 1

STEP 2

208


■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback

Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.

■ When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display

LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.

ERROR: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CDmay be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.

WAIT: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for

a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still

cannot be played back.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, ordue to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when aproblem is detected.

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-ods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

209


3

Interior features

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.(12 cm)

●Low-quality and deformed CDs

●CDs with a transparent or translucentrecording area

●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-Rlabels attached to them, or that have hadthe label peeled off

210


NOTICE

■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs orthe player itself.

●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

●Do not apply oil to the CD player.

●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

●Do not insert more than one CD at a time.

211


3

Interior features

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (P. 205)

Selecting a folder

■ Selecting folders one at a timePress () or () to select the desired folder.

■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folderPress and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder isreached, press the switch once again.

■ Returning to the first folderPress and hold () until you hear a beep.

Power Volume

Selecting a file

CD ejectPlayback

Search playback

CD insert

Selecting a CD

Random playback

Repeat play

Displays text message

Selecting a file

Selecting a folder

212


Selecting and scanning files

■ Selecting 1 file at a time

Turn the or press or on to select the desired

file.

■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folderPress .

When the desired file is reached, press the switch once again.

Repeat play

■ To repeat a filePress (RPT).

Folder repeat

■ To repeat all of the files on a folderPress and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Random playback

■ To play files from a particular folder in random orderPress (RAND).

■ To play all of the files on a disc in random orderPress and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folderno./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3only) Track title Artist name.

213


3

Interior features

■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback

Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.

■ When LOAD, ERROR, WAIT or NO MUSIC is shown on the display.

LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.

ERROR: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CDmay be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.

WAIT: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for

a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still

cannot be played back.

NO MUSIC: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, ordue to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when aproblem is detected while the CD player is being used.

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-ods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

214


■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3compression.

WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formatsrecorded by them that can be used.

●MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standardsMP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequenciesMPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit ratesMPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)* Compatible with VBR

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural●WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standardsWMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit ratesVer. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)*Only compatible with 2-channel playback

●Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of theCD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the discis scratched or marked with fingerprints.

215


3

Interior features

●Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be dis-played correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

●File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those withthe extension .mp3 or .wma.

●Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discsthat contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track titleand artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (Thenumber of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the tracktitle and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

216


●MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are firstchecked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. Tomake the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in anyfiles other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannotbe played.

●Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMAfiles, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. Thismay result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

●Playback

• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depend-ing on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.

217


3

Interior features

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.Doing so may damage the CD player and render the CD insert/eject functionunusable.

●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.(12 cm)

●Low-quality and deformed CDs

●CDs with a transparent or translucentrecording area

●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-Rlabels attached to them, or that have hadthe label peeled off

218


NOTICE

■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the CDs or theplayer itself.

●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

●Do not apply oil to the CD player.

●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

●Do not insert more than one CD at a time.

219


3

Interior features

Optimal use of the audio system

Using the AUDIO CONTROL function

■ Changing modes

Pressing selects the mode to be change in the following order.

POSBASMIDTREFADBALASL

Displays the current mode.Changes the following set-ting.

• Listening position (P. 220)

The sound feel setting can bechanged to produce the bestsound for each listening posi-tion.

• Sound quality and volumebalance (P. 220)

The sound quality and balancesetting can be changed to pro-duce the best sound.

• Automatic Sound LevelizerON/OFF (P. 221)

220


■ Changing the listening position

Turning changes the position in the following order.

■ Adjusting sound quality

Turning adjusts the level.

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or CDmode.

Display Listening position

DRIVER Position best suited to the driver’s seat

FRONTPosition best suited to the driver’s and front passenger seats

REAR Position best suited to the rear seats

ALL Position best suited to all seats

Sound qual-ity mode

Mode displayed

LevelTurn to the

leftTurn to the

right

Bass* BAS -5 to 5

Low HighMid-range* MID -5 to 5

Treble* TRE -5 to 5

Front/rear volume balance

FAD F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front

Left/right volume balance

BAL L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right

221


3

Interior features

■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

Turning to the right turns ON the ASL, and turning to the

left turns OFF the ASL.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noiselevel as you drive your vehicle.

222


Using the AUX adapter

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjust-ments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audiodevice.

This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to itthrough the vehicle’s speakers.

Connect the portable audiodevice.

Press .

STEP 1

STEP 2

223


3

Interior features

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned OFF.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for a few sec-ond.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source

changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.

FM1FM2CD changerAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3

Adjusting the volume

Press + on to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume.

Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steeringwheel.

Power on, select audiosourceVolumeRadio: Select radio stationsCD: Select tracks, files (MP3and WMA) and discs

224


Selecting a radio station

Press to select the radio mode.

Press or on the switch to select a radio station.To seek for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you heara beep.

Selecting a track/file

Press to select the CD mode.

Press or on the switch to select the desired track/file.

Selecting a disc in the CD player

Press to select the CD mode.

Press and hold or on switch until a beep is heard.

CAUTION

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

225

3

Interior features


Hands-free phone system features (for cellular phone)


The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situations:

●The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.

●The cellular phone has a low battery.

●The cellular phone is not connected to the system.

●The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal material cov-ers or touches the phone.

■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent the personal data from being improperlyaccessed.

■ Required profiles for the cellular phone

●HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0

●OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1

This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or receive callswithout using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and with-out operating the cellular phone.

Title Page

Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

P. 228

Making a phone call P. 236

Setting a cellular phone P. 240

Security and system setup P. 244

Using the phone book P. 247

: If equipped

226


■ Trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Certification for the hands-free phone system

FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A

IC ID: 1551A-BTAU01A

MADE IN JAPAN

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is sub-ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation.






227


3

Interior features

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION:

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth, for uncon-trolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines inSupplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that itdeemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But itis desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and morebetween the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feetand legs).

Co-location:

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter.

CAUTION


Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to a cellular phone

Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may becomehigh resulting in damage to the phone.

228


Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Audio unit

Displays such items as mes-sage, name, and phone num-ber

Lower-case characters andspecial characters, such as anumlaut, cannot be displayed.

Push and hold: Displays infor-mation that is too long to bedisplayed at one time on thescreenSelects speed dialsSelects items such as menuor numberTurn: Selects an itemPress: Inputs the selecteditemDisplays the reception levelDisplays Bluetooth® connec-tion condition

If BT is not displayed, thehands-free phone systemcannot be used.

229


3

Interior features

■ Steering wheel

Volume

The voice guidance volumecannot be adjusted by usingthis button.

Hands-free phone systemON/starts a callHands-free phone systemOFF/ends a call/refuses a callPress: Voice command sys-tem ONPress and hold: Voice com-mand system OFF

■ Microphone

230


Operating the system by using a voice command

By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voicecommands can be given to allow for operation of the hands-free phone

system without checking the display or operating .

■ Operation procedure when using a voice command

Press and say a command for a desired function.(P. 232)

■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice commandThe following auxiliary commands can be used when operating thesystem using a voice command:

Cancel: Exits the hands-free phone systemRepeat: Repeats the previous voice guidance instructionGo back: Returns to the previous procedureHelp: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is regis-tered for the selected function

231


3

Interior features

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register acellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be enteredautomatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered.Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone:

Press or .

The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions areheard.

Register a phone name by either of the following methods.

a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to be

registered.

b. Press and say a name to be registered.

Voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction forinputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.

Input the passkey into the cellular phone.Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the opera-tion of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

232


Menu list of the hands-free phone system

■ Normal operation

First menuSecond

menuThird menu Operation detail

Callback - -Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

Redial - -Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

Dial by number

- - Dialing by inputting a number

Dial by name

- -Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book

Phonebook

Add Entry - Adding a new number

Change Name

-Changing a name in the phone book

Delete Entry

- Deleting the phone book data

Delete Speed Dial(Del Spd Dial)

- Deleting a registered speed dial

List Names - List the phone book data

Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)

- Registering speed dial

233


3

Interior features

Setup

Security

Set PIN Setting a PIN code

Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book

Phonebook Unlock

Unlocking the phone book

Phone Setup

Pair PhoneRegistering a cellular phone to be used

Change NameChanging a registered name of a cellular phone

DeleteDeleting a registered cellular phone

List phonesListing the registered cellular phones

Select phoneSelecting a cellular phone to be used

Set Passkey Changing the passkey

System Setup

Guidance Volume(Guidance Vol)

Setting voice guidance volume

Initialize Initialization

First menuSecond

menuThird menu Operation detail

234


■ Using a short cut key

First menu Second menu Operation detail

Dial “XXX (name)” -Dialing a number registered in the phone book

Phone book add entry - Adding a new number

Phone book change name

-Changing a name of a phone number in the phone book

Phone book delete entry

- Deleting phone book data

Phone book set speed dial

- Registering speed dial

Phone book delete speed dial

- Deleting speed dial

PhonebookPhonebook Unlock Unlocking the phone book

Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book

235


3

Interior features

■ Automatic adjustment of volume

When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automaticallyincreases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speeddrops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.

■ When using a voice command

●For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound), (star), and + (plus).

●Say a command correctly and clearly.

■ The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:

●When driving on a rough road

●When driving at high speeds

●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

■ The following cannot be performed while driving:

●Operating the system with

●Registering a cellular phone to the system

■ Changing the passkey

P. 243

236


Making a phone call

Dialing by inputting a number

Press and say “Dial by number”.

Press and say the phone number.

■ Making a phone call● Dialing by inputting a number

1. “Dial by number”

● Dialing by inputting a name1. “Dial by name”

● Speed dialing

● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory1. “Redial”

● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory1. “Call back”

■ Receiving a phone call● Answering the phone

● Refusing the call

■ Transferring a call

■ Using a call history memory● Dialing

● Storing data in the phone book

● Deleting

STEP 1

STEP 2

237


3

Interior features

Dial by one of the following methods:

a. Press .

b. Press and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Dialing by inputting a name

Press and say “Dial by name”.

Select a registered name to be input by either of the followingmethods:

a. Press and say a registered name.

b. Press and say “List names”. Press while thedesired name is being read aloud.

Dial by one of the following methods:

a. Press .

b. Press and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Speed dialing

Press .

Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.

Press .

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

238


When receiving a phone call

■ Answering the phone

Press .

■ Refusing the call

Press .

Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system whiledialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following meth-ods:

a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the opera-tion of the phone.

b. Press *1.

c. Press and say “Call Transfer” *2.*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call

from the cellular phone to the system during a call.*2: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from

the system to the cellular phone.

Using a call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use number stored in call history memory:

Press and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in theoutgoing history memory) or “Call back” (when using a numberstored in the incoming history memory).

STEP 1

239


3

Interior features

Select the number by either of the following methods:a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-

played.

b. Select the desired number by using .

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press or select “Dial” by using a voice command or

.

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice

command or .

Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

■ Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history mem-ories.

■ When talking on the phone

●Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.

●Keep the volume of the receiving voice down. Otherwise, voice echo willincrease.

STEP 2

240


Setting a cellular phone

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or , and do the pro-

cedure for registering a cellular phone. (P. 231)

Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the sys-tem to function. The following function can be used for registered cellularphones:

■ Functions and operation proceduresTo enter menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a

voice command or :

● Registering a cellular phone 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Pair Phone”

● Selecting a cellular phone to be used 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Select Phone”

● Changing a registered name 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Change Name”

● Listing the registered cellular phones 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “List Phones”

● Deleting a cellular phone 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Delete”

● Changing the passkey 1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Set Passkey”

241


3

Interior features

Selecting a cellular phone to be used

Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following meth-

ods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or :

a. Press and say the desired phone name.

b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the

desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press .

Pattern B

Select a cellular phone to be used by using .

Changing a registered name

Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

Select a name of cellular phone to be changed by either of thefollowing methods:

a. Press and say the desired phone name, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press and say “List phones”. While the desired phone

name is being read aloud, press .

c. Select the desired phone name by using .

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

242


Press or select “Record Name” by using , and say a

new name.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

Listing the registered cellular phones

Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or begins read-

ing aloud the list of the registered cellular phones.When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.

Pressing while a name of cellular phone is being read selects thecellular phone, and the following functions will be available:

• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete”

Deleting a cellular phone

Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the followingmethods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

:

a. Press and say the name of the desired cellular phone.

b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the

desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press .

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

243


3

Interior features

Pattern B

Select a desired cellular phone to be deleted by using .

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Press , say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” by

using a voice command or .

Pattern B

Select a 4 to 8-digit number by using .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been

input, press once again.

■ The number of cellular phone that can be registered

Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 2

STEP 3

244


Security and system setup

Setting or changing the PIN

■ Setting a PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

■ Changing the PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

■ Security setting items and operation procedure● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)

1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Set PIN”

● Locking the phone book 1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Lock”

● Unlocking the phone book 1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Unlock”

■ System setup items and operation procedure● Setting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Guidance Vol”

● Initialization 1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Initialize”

can only be used for system setup operation.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

245


3

Interior features

Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or .

Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book

Select “Phonebook lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook unlock

(Phbk Unlock)” by using a voice command or .

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Con-

firm” by using a voice command or :

a. Press and say the registered PIN.

b. Input a new PIN by using .

Setting voice guidance volume

Select “Guidance Vol” by using .

Change the voice guidance volume.

To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

246


Initialization

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using .

Select “Confirm” by using again.

■ Initialization

●The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book• Outgoing and incoming history• Speed dial• Registered cellular phone data• Security code

●Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to itsoriginal state.

■ When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

●Dialing by inputting a name

●Speed dialing

●Dialing a number stored in the call history memory

●Using the phone book

STEP 1

STEP 2

247


3

Interior features

Using the phone book

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

● Inputting a phone number by using a voice command

● Transferring data from the cellular phone

● Inputting a phone number by using

● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history

■ Adding procedure

Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

● Adding a new phone number 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Add Entry”

● Setting speed dial 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

● Changing a registered name 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Change Name”

● Deleting registered data 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Entry”

● Deleting speed dial 1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”

● Listing the registered data 1. “Phonebook” 2. “List Names”

STEP 1

248


Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command

STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-2 Press , say the desired number, and select “Con-firm” by using a voice command.

Transferring data from the cellular phoneSTEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice

command or .

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone forthe details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the follow-ing methods:a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is dis-

played, and select “Confirm” by using a voice com-mand.

b. Select the desired data by using .

Inputting a phone number by using

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .

STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using , and press

once again.

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

STEP 2

249


3

Interior features

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming historySTEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or

.

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice com-

mand or .

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the follow-ing methods:a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is

displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voicecommand.

b. Select the desired data by using .

Select the name to be registered by either of the following meth-

ods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or :

a. Press and say the desired name.

b. Select “Record Name” by using , and say the desired

name.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or again.

In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Con-firm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 3

250


Setting speed dial

Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice command

or .

Select the data to be registered as speed dial by either of the fol-lowing methods:

a. Press , say desired number, and select “Confirm” by

using a voice command or .

b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired name is

being read aloud, press , and select “Confirm” by using a

voice command or .

c. Select the desired data by using .

Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speeddial by either of the following methods:a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using

a voice command or .

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

251


3

Interior features

Changing a registered name

Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

Select a name to be changed by either of the following methods.a. Press , say desired name, and select “Confirm” by using

a voice command or .

b. Press , and say “List names”. During the desired name is

read aloud, press , and select “Confirm” by using a voice

command or .

c. Select the desired name by using .

Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.

Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command

or .

Deleting registered data

Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and

select “Confirm” by using a voice command or :

a. Press , and say the name of the desired phone numberto be deleted.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

252


b. Press , say “List phones”. While the name of the desired

phone number is being read aloud, press .

Pattern B

Select data to be deleted by using .

Deleting speed dial

Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” by using a voice com-

mand or .

Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is regis-

tered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

Listing the registered data

Selecting “List names” by using a voice command begins reading the listof the registered data.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.

Pressing while a data is being read aloud selects the data, and thefollowing function will be available.

• Dialing: “Dial”• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”• Setting speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

■ Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

253

3

Interior features


Interior lights list

Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in enter-ing the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in thefollowing illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence ofthe electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether thedoors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.

Front personal lights (P. 255)Front interior lights (P. 255)Rear personal lights ( P. 255)Rear interior lights( P. 255)Door courtesy lightingShift lever lightingThis light turns on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundingswhen the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-TION ON mode.

Front foot well lightingOuter foot lights

254


■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

If the following lights remain ON when the door is not fully closed and the DOORswitch is ON, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

● Interior lights

●Front personal lights

●Front foot well lighting

●Rear door courtesy lighting


Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customiz-able features P. 447)

255


3

Interior features

Interior lights

Door position ON/OFFThe illuminated entry system isactivated when the switch is notin the locked position (the doorposition is on).

Front and rear interior lightsON/OFFPressing the switch also turnsthe front personal lights on/off.

Personal lights

Front

ON/OFFAs for front personal lights, theilluminated entry system is acti-vated even if the switch is in theoff position when the DOORswitch of the interior light is on.

Rear

Interior lights and personal lights

256


List of storage features

Glove box

Open (push button)Lock with the mechanical keyUnlock with the mechanical key

Glove boxOverhead consoleCup holdersConsole boxAuxiliary box

Glove box

257


3

Interior features

Console box

To open, press the button.

To close, pull up the lever.

■ Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.

■ Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch located in the glove box. ( P. 41)

CAUTION


Keep the glove box closed.Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Glove box and console box

258


■ Tray in the console box

■ Console box light

The console box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.

CAUTION


Keep the console box closed.Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

The tray slides forward/backward and can beremoved.

Console box

259


3

Interior features

Overhead console

The overhead console is useful fortemporarily storing sunglasses andsimilar small items.

CAUTION

■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses maywarp or become cracked.


Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.Items may fall out and cause injury.

Overhead console

260


Cup holders

FrontTo open, press down and releasethe front of the cup holder lid.

Rear

Cup holders

261


3

Interior features

■ Using the cup holder (front) to store small items

■ The cup holder (front) can be adjustable to the size of the cups or drink-cans

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or suddenbraking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■ When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Remove the holder.

Change the holder position.

Cup holders

262


Auxiliary box

To open, press down the knob.

CAUTION


Keep the auxiliary box closed.In the event of sudden braking, personal injury may result from contact due tomovement of the open auxiliary box or items that may come out of the auxiliary box.

Auxiliary box

263

3

Interior features


Sun visors

Forward position:Flip down.Side position:Flip down, unhook, and swingto the side.Side extender:Place in side position, thenslide backwards.

264


Vanity mirror

The light turns on when thecover is opened.

265


3

Interior features

Clock

■ The clock is displayed when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.


Adjusts the hour.Adjusts the minutes.Rounds to the nearest hour.**: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00

1:30 to 1:59 2:00


266


Ashtray

CAUTION

■ When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed.Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

■ To prevent fire

●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, thenmake sure the ashtray is fully closed.

●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

Push the back part of the lid toopen.

To remove, pull the ashtrayupwards.

267


3

Interior features

Cigarette lighter

■ The cigarette lighter can be used when


CAUTION

■ To avoid burns or fires

●Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.

●Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

●Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.

Push the back part of the lid toopen, and push the cigarettelighter down.

The cigarette lighter will pop upwhen it is ready for use.

268


Power outlet

■ The power outlet can be used when


NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.


Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10A.

269


3

Interior features

Seat heaters

■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when


■ When not in use

Set the dial to 0. The indicator light turns off.

CAUTION

■ Burns

●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater onto avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled• Persons with sensitive skin• Persons who are fatigued• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,

cold remedies, etc.)●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of theseat and may lead to overheating.

Heats the seats

The indicator light comes on.The higher the number, thewarmer the seats become.

Left front seat Right front seat

: If equipped

270


NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Set the dial to 0 when the engine is not running.

271


3

Interior features

Seat heaters and ventilators

■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when


■ When not in use

Set the dial to 0. The indicator light turns off.

The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflowby blowing air from the seats.

Heats the seats

The indicator light (orange)comes on.The higher the number, thewarmer the seats become.

Blows air from the seats

The indicator light (green)comes on.The higher the number, thestronger the airflow becomes.

Left front seat Right front seat

: If equipped

272


CAUTION

■ Burns

●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater onto avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled• Persons with sensitive skin• Persons who are fatigued• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,

cold remedies, etc.)●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of theseat and may lead to overheating.

NOTICE

■ To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.


Set the dial to 0 when the engine is not running.

273


3

Interior features

Armrest

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

Pull the armrest down for use.

274


Rear sunshade

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switchshown below.

Type A

Raise/lower

Type B

: If equipped

275


3

Interior features

■ The rear sunshade can be used when


■ Reverse operation feature

The rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted into R. Therear sunshade rises when the shift lever is shifted out of R and vehicle speedreaches 9 mph (15 km/h).

■ When the reverse operation feature does not operate

The rear sunshade may not lower or rise automatically. In this case, press the switchto lower or raise the rear sunshade.

CAUTION

■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered

Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.They may get caught, causing injury.

NOTICE


Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.

■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade

Observe the following precautions.

●Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.

●Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.

●Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.

●Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.

●Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.

276


Extended trunk

CAUTION

■ When not in use

Ensure that the armrest door is closed.In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward intothe cabin, resulting in injury.

Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space andrear seat area.

Pull down the armrest.

Open the armrest door.

The armrest door can be lockedand unlocked using themechanical key.

LockUnlock

STEP 1

STEP 2

277


3

Interior features

Floor mat

CAUTION

■ When inserting the floor mat

Observe the following precautions.Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the move-ment of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.

●Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correctside faces upward.

●Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.

Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.

Secure the driver’s floor matusing the hooks provided.

278


Trunk features

■ Cargo hooks

Cargo hooks are provided forsecuring loose items.

■ Grocery bag hooks

■ Luggage mat

Pull the lever upwards when lift-ing the luggage mat up.

279


3

Interior features

CAUTION

■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not inuse.

NOTICE

■ When closing the trunk

Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.The luggage mat may get damaged.

The lever can be hooked on theedge of the trunk.

280


Garage door opener

The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink.

Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttonswhich can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to theprogramming method below appropriate for the device.

ButtonsIndicator

■ Programming the HomeLink

Point the remote control transmit-ter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to75 mm) from the HomeLink but-tons.

Keep the HomeLink indicatorlight in view while programming.

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,and other devices.

STEP 1

281


3

Interior features

Press and hold one of theHomeLink buttons and the trans-mitter button. When theHomeLink indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidflash, you can release both buttons.

If the HomeLink indicator lightcomes on but does not flash,flashes rapidly for 2 secondsand remains lit, the HomeLink

button is already programmed.Use the other buttons or followthe “Reprogramming aHomeLink button” instruc-tions. (P. 283)

Test the HomeLink operation bypressing the newly programmedbutton.

If a HomeLink button has beenprogrammed for a garage door,check to see if the garage dooropens and closes. If the garagedoor does not operate, see if yourremote control transmitter is of therolling code type. Press and holdthe programmed HomeLink but-ton. The remote control transmitteris of the rolling code type if theHomeLink indicator light flashesrapidly for 2 seconds and thenremains lit. If your transmitter is ofthe rolling code type, proceed tothe heading “Programming a roll-ing code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each ofthe remaining HomeLink buttons.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

282


■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under theheading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with thesteps listed below.

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage dooropener motor. The exact location and color of the button mayvary by brand of garage door opener motor.Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door openermotor for the location of the training button.

Press the training button.Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3below.

Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garagedoor may open.If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If thedoor does not open, press and release the button a third time. This thirdpress and release will complete the programming process by openingthe garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognizethe HomeLink transceiver and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code systemfor any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming alldevices in the Canadian market

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the sur-face of the HomeLink.Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote controlbutton for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible trans-ceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

283


3

Interior features

Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly pro-grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates cor-rectly.Repeat the steps above to program another device for each ofthe remaining HomeLink buttons.

■ Programming other devicesTo program other devices such as home security systems, home doorlocks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.

■ Reprogramming a buttonThe individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can bereprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming aHomeLink button” instructions.

Operating the HomeLink

Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicatorlight should come on.

The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send asignal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink button

Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, theHomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still press-ing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on thetransmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to arapid flash.

STEP 5

STEP 6

284


Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)

Press and hold the 2 outside but-tons for 10 seconds until the indi-cator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure toerase the programs stored in theHomeLink memory.

■ Before programming

● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away fromthe HomeLink button.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the ICRules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

285


3

Interior features

CAUTION

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects areout of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door openeror device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safetystandards.This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door ordevice without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

286


Compass

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in whichthe vehicle is heading.

■ Operation

To turn the compass on or off,push and hold AUTO for 3seconds.

■ Displays and directions

Display Direction

N North

NE Northeast

E East

SE Southeast

S South

SW Southwest

W West

NW Northwest

287


3

Interior features

Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by theearth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will devi-ate.To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibrationStop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Push and hold AUTO for 6 sec-onds.

A number (1 to 15) appears on thecompass display.

STEP 1

STEP 2

288


Press AUTO, and referring to the map above, select the numberof the zone where you are.If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the cali-bration is complete.

■ Circling calibrationStop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Push and hold AUTO for 9 sec-onds.

C appears on the compass display.

Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a directionis displayed.

If there is not enough space todrive in a circle, drive around theblock until the direction is dis-played.

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

289


3

Interior features

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

●The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under asteel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,near a large vehicle, etc.).

●The vehicle has become magnetized.(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

●The battery has been disconnected.

●A door is open.

CAUTION

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle isstopped.

■ When doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neigh-borhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE

■ To avoid compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

●Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth'smagnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

290


Maintenance and care 4

291


Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior............. 292

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.............. 295

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements ....................... 298

General maintenance ......... 300

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs............................... 303


Do-it-yourself service precautions........................... 304

Hood.......................................... 308

Positioning a floor jack ......... 309

Engine compartment ............. 311

Tires............................................ 326

Tire inflation pressure........... 334

Wheels ...................................... 338

Air conditioning filter ........... 340

Electronic key battery.......... 342

Checking and replacing fuses ........................................ 344

Headlight aim ......................... 352

Light bulbs................................ 354

292


Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

■ Automatic car washes

●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.

●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface andharm your vehicle’s paint.

■ High pressure car washes

●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of thewindows.

●Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-erly.

■ Touch-up paint (if equipped)

Touch-up paint may be used to cover small chips or scratches.

Apply the paint soon after the damage occurs or corrosion may set in. To apply thetouch-up paint so it is hardly noticeable the trick is to apply it only to the bare spots.Apply only the smallest amount possible and do not paint the surface around thescratch or chip.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-tion.

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehiclebody, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirtand dust.Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as achamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-oughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehiclebody is cool.

293


4

Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushesor abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the samemild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

■ Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■ To prevent deterioration and do by corrosion

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast• After driving on salted roads• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron

powder or chemical substances• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

CAUTION

■ Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

294


NOTICE

■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces

Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensingwindshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to the off position.If the wiper switch is in AUTO, the wipers mayoperate and the wiper blades may be dam-aged.Off

295


4


Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keepit in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interiorRemove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaceswith a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

■ Cleaning the leather areas● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened withdiluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-gent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipeoff all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remainingmoisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.

■ Synthetic leather areas● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a spongeor soft cloth.

● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirtand wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

296


■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to therear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water togently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to theheater wires or antenna.

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to main-tain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge orbrush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excel-lent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check thebelts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

■ Water in the vehicle

●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 77)Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,resulting in death or severe injury.

297


4


NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

●Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline oracidic solutions, dye, or bleach.

●Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leathersurfaces.

●Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Parkthe vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, asthey may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes intocontact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may alsocause the body to rust.

■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

298

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure perfor-mance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repairshop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular main-tenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regularchecks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.

■ General maintenanceShould be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourselfor by a Lexus dealer.

■ Scheduled maintenanceShould be performed at specified intervals according to the mainte-nance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “War-ranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ScheduledMaintenance”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenanceYou can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-ranty coverage.

The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or“Warranty Booklet”.

299

4-2. Maintenance

4


■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer

●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information. They are well informed about the operations of allsystems on your vehicle.

●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has beenperformed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while yourvehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

■ Warning in handling of battery

●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can-cer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and washany affected area immediately.

●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han-dling. (P. 322)

300

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Battery Maintenance-free. (P. 322)

Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 319)

Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 317)

Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 313)

Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?

Power steering fluid At the correct level? (P. 320)

Radiator/condenser/hosesNot blocked with foreign matter? (P. 319)

Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 325)

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performedat the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “OwnersManual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you noticeshould be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified serviceshop for advice.

301

4-2. Maintenance

4


Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal• Moves smoothly (without uneven

pedal effort or catching)?

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

• Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in P?

Brake pedal• Moves smoothly?• Does it have appropriate clearance

and correct amount of free play?

Brakes

• Not pull to one side when applied?• Loss of brake effectiveness?• Spongy feeling brake pedal?• Pedal almost touches floor?

Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?

Lights• Do all the lights come on?• Headlights aimed correctly?

(P. 352)

Parking brake• Moves smoothly?• Can hold the vehicle securely on

an incline?

Seat belts• Does the seat belt system operate

smoothly?• Are the belts undamaged?

Seats• Do the seat controls operate prop-

erly?

302

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Steering wheel• Moves smoothly?• Has correct free play?• No strange noises?

Items Check points

Door/trunk • Operate smoothly?

Engine hood • The lock system works properly?

Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking?

Tire

• Inflation pressure is correct?• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-

aged?• Tires rotated according to the

maintenance schedule?• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performingmaintenance checks.

303

4-2. Maintenance

4


Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which includeOBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the oper-ation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes onThe OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere inthe emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M testand may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to servicethe vehicle.

■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes maynot be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driv-ing tripsThe error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless thevehicle is driven 40 or more times.

■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testContact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

304


Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct proce-dure given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (P. 322)

• Warm water• Baking soda• Grease• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level (P. 319)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding brake

fluid)

Engine coolant level (P. 317)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene gly-col based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. For the USA:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.For Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)

305


4


Items Parts and tools

Engine oil level (P. 313)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (P. 344)• Fuse with same amperage rating as

original

Tire inflation pressure (P. 334)• Tire pressure gauge• Compressed air source

Headlight aim (P. 352) • Phillips-head screwdriver

Power steering fluid level (P. 320)

• Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III

• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding power

steering fluid)

Radiator and condenser (P. 319)

Washer fluid (P. 325)• Water washer fluid containing anti-

freeze (for winter use)• Funnel

306


CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move sud-denly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury.

■ When working on the engine compartment:

●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the enginecompartment.

●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fueland battery fumes are flammable.

●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous andcorrosive sulfuric acid.

●Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage paintedsurfaces.If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean waterimmediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:

Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electriccooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or thecoolant temperature is high. (P. 319)

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from gettingin the eyes.

307


4


NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner:

Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt inthe air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator is high.If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

308


Hood

CAUTION

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion andcause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Lift the hood catch and lift thehood.

STEP 1

STEP 2

309


4


Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

■ Front

■ Rear

310


CAUTION

■ When raising your vehicle:

Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or seriousinjury.

●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.

●Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only bythe floor jack.Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.

●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

●Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shiftlever in P.

●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehi-cle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath thefloor jack.

●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such asthe one shown in the illustration.

311


4


Engine compartment

Power steering fluid reservoir(P. 320)

Engine oil filler cap(P. 314)

Engine oil level dipstick(P. 313)

Brake fluid reservoir(P. 319)

Battery (P. 322)

Fuse box (P. 344)Electric cooling fansCondenser (P. 319)Radiator (P. 319)Washer fluid tank

(P. 325)Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 317)

312


Engine compartment cover

■ Removing the engine compartment cover Front

Right-hand side

When installing the cover, make sure that the engine coolant reservoirhose positioned as shown in the illustration.

Left-hand side

313


4


■ Installing the clips

Press the tip of the clip against ahard surface, such as a desk, toallow the center part of the clipto be pushed up.InsertPress

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oillevel on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oilPark the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, waitmore than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

Hold a rag under the end and pullthe dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.Reinsert the dipstick fully.Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check theoil level.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

314


Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

LowFull

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near thelow level mark, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in theengine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed beforeadding oil.

Remove the oil filler cap.Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.

It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on thedipstick.

STEP 6

Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil

Items Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

315


4


■ Recommended viscosity

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice forgood fuel economy, and goodstarting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available,SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.However, it should be replacedwith SAE 5W-30 at the next oilchange.

■ How to read oil container labelsSome oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks thathelp you to select the proper oil.

Outside temperature

316


■ Engine oil consumption

●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality ofthe oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre-quent acceleration and deceleration.

●A new engine consumes more oil.

●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil mayhave become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000km)

● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km),contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Changing the engine oil (USA only)

To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below:

1. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF with the trip meter A readingshown. (P. 125)

2. While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START STOP”switch to the IGNITION ON mode. Continue to press and hold the button untilthe trip meter displays 000000.

CAUTION

■ Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skindisorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoidprolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, washthoroughly with soap and water.

●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information con-cerning recycling or disposal.

●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

317


4


Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the res-ervoir when the engine is cold.

FullLow

If the level is on or below the L line,add coolant up to the F line.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage:

Check the oil level on regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.

■ When adding the engine coolant

When installing the reservoir cap, make surethat the engine coolant reservoir hose posi-tioned as shown in the illustration.

318


■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cockand water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check forleaks in the cooling system.

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-lifehybrid organic acid technology.

USA: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap isremoved, causing burns or other injuries.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of waterand anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protectionand cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

319


4


Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of theircondition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should bebetween the MAX and MIN lineson the tank.

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

■ Adding fluid

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.

Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Items Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Useonly newly opened brake fluid.

320


Power steering fluid

■ Fluid levelThe fluid level should be within the appropriate range.

Full (when cold)Add fluid (when cold)Full (when hot)Add fluid (when hot)

Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 min-utes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid tempera-ture, 140F - 175F [60C - 80C])

Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room tempera-ture, 50F - 85F [10C - 30C])

CAUTION

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage paintedsurfaces.If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator is high.If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

321


4


■ Checking the fluid levelMake sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise andwipe the dipstick clean.Reinstall the reservoir cap.Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level.

Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III

Items Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding fluid)

CAUTION

■ Checking the fluid level

Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.

NOTICE

■ When adding fluid

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.

■ After replacing the reservoir cap

Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or dam-age.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

322


Battery

Check the battery as follows.

■ Battery exteriorMake sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that thereare no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

TerminalsHold-down clamp

■ Checking battery conditionCheck the battery condition using the indicator color.

Blue: Good conditionWhite: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.

323


4


■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable andexplosive. Therefore, before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect theground cable.

●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-necting the charger cables to the battery.

■ After recharging the battery

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1. Shift the shift lever to P.

2. Open and close any of the doors.

3. Restart the engine.

324


CAUTION

■ Chemicals in the battery:

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydro-gen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or seriousinjury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:

●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

●Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safety charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage orclosed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at aquicker rate.

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyesFlush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth whiletraveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skinWash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical atten-tion immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothesIt can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing andfollow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyteDrink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten rawegg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

325


4


Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or thewarning message appears on themulti-information display, thewasher tank may be empty. Addwasher fluid.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accesso-ries are turned off.

CAUTION

■ When refilling the washer fluid

Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluidcontains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

326


Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules andtreadwear.

■ Checking tires

New treadTreadwear indicatorWorn tread

The location of treadwear indi-cators is shown by the TWI or marks, etc., molded on the side-wall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition andpressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation If equipped with full-size spare tire

Rotate the tires in the ordershown.

To equalize tire wear and extendtire life, Lexus recommends thattire rotation is carried out at thesame interval as tire inspection.

Front

327


4


Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and trans-mitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be regis-tered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warningsystem must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmit-ter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 329)

If equipped with compact spare tire

Rotate the tires in the ordershown.

To equalize tire wear and extendtire life, Lexus recommends thattire rotation is carried out at thesame interval as tire inspection.

■ The tire pressure warning systemYour Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that usestire pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire infla-tion pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 377)

Vehicles with compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is notequipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.

Front

328


Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the followingcircumstances:● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling

speed or load weight, etc.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tireinflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning systemPark the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch OFF.While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflationpressure level. (P. 429)Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflationpressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based onthis pressure level.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ONmode.

Push and hold the tire pressurewarning reset switch until the tirepressure warning light blinksslowly 3 times.

Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and thenturn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

329


4


Registering and selecting ID codes

■ Registering ID codes2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can beregistered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you canswitch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressurewarning select switch.

There are 2 settings:

“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.

“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a newset of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmittersfrom your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by yourLexus dealer.

■ Selecting ID codesWhen replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matchesthe new tire set. If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to thewrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operateproperly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warninglight comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunc-tion.

MAIN2nd

330


■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose thefabric or bulges indicating internal damage

●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indi-cate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if theyhave seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the GrossAxle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever isgreater.As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle WeightRatings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 334, 435).

331


4


■ Tire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction perfor-mance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-coveredor icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tiresis recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be ade-quate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All sea-son tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared withsnow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in accelerationand handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capac-ity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as originalequipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not installstudded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 172)

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted tothe specified level.

■ If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified leveland initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. Ifrepeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, havethe vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warninglight does not flash 3 times.

●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning lightblinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.

332


■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressurechecks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of dailyvehicle checks.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

FCC ID: PAXPMV107J

FCC ID: HYQ13BCX

IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J

IC ID: 1551A-13BCX


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.


Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

333


4


CAUTION

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may causedamage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.

●Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

●Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.

●Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

●Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tireinflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning lightmay not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on whenthe tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-mitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-ing ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to thetires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

334


Tire inflation pressure

■ Tire inflation pressureThe recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis-played on the tire and loading information label. (P. 429)

335


4

Maintenance and care■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valveTire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended lev-els, adjust inflate the tire.If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement andadjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leak-age.Reinstall the tire valve cap.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

336


■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel efficiency

●Reduced driving comfort and tire life

●Reduced safety

●Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

●Check only when the tires are cold.If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven formore than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressurereading.

●Always use a tire pressure gauge.The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressuresthat are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

●Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for thetire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-anced.

337


4


CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occurand result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

●Excessive wear

●Uneven wear

●Poor handling

●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

●Poor sealing of the tire bead

●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leak-age, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them assoon as possible.

338


Wheels

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and trans-mitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning inthe event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tirepressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 328)

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Oth-erwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling con-trol.

■ Wheel selectionWhen replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that theyare equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rimwidth, and offset.Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

Lexus does not recommend using:

● Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

● Bent wheels that have been straightened

■ Aluminum wheel precautions● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with

your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tirechains.

● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and aplastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

339


4


CAUTION

■ When replacing wheels

●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in theOwner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valvesand transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or otherqualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressurewarning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

340


Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to main-tain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Replacement methodTurn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Open the glove box. Removethe glove box cover.

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the filter.

Be sure that the correct side ofthe filter faces up when installingit.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

341


4


■ Checking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenanceschedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning orearly replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the system

●When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.

●When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

■ Cleaning method

If the filter is dirty, clean by blow-ing compressed air through thefilter from the downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)from the filter and blow forapproximately 2 minutes at 72psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 orbar).

If it is not available, have the filtercleaned by your Lexus dealer.

342


Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■ You will need the following items:● Flathead screwdriver

● Small Phillips-head screwdriver

● Lithium battery (CR1632)

■ Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the +terminal facing up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

343


4


■ If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control willnot function properly.

●The operational range is reduced.

■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.

●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.

●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION

■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

●Always work with dry hands.Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

●Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

344


Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.Remove the engine compartment cover.

P. 312Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment

Push the tabs in and lift the lidoff.

Driver's side instrumentpanel

Remove the lid.

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”(P. 346) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

345


4


Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuseBlown fuse

Replace it with one of an appro-priate amperage rating. Theamperage rating can be foundon the fuse box lid.

Type B


Replace it with one of an appro-priate amperage rating.

Type C


Contact your Lexus dealer.

STEP 6

346


Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■ Engine compartment

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 PSB 30 A Pre-collision seat belt

2 H-LP CLN 30 A

3 P-P / SEAT 30 A Power seat

4 RR DEF 50 A Rear window defogger

5 ABS NO.2 30 AAnti-lock brake system, vehicle stabil-ity control system

6 FAN MAIN 50 A Electric cooling fans

7 ABS NO.1 50 AAnti-lock brake system, vehicle stabil-ity control system

8 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system

9 RR FOG 10 A

10 ALT-CDS 10 A Alternator condenser

11 ST 30 A Starting system

347


4


12 ALT 140 A

PSB, H-LP CLN, P-P/SEAT, RR DEF, ABS NO.2, FAN MAIN, ABS NO.1, HTR, RR FOG, RR DOOR RH, RR DOOR LH, FUEL OPN, FR FOG, OBD, STOP, TI & TE, A/C, PWR, DOOR NO.2, S/ROOF, GAUGE NO.2, POWER, P/SEAT

13 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system

14 IG2 20 AGAUGE NO.2, IGN, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

15 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights

16 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system

17 E-ACM 10 A Electric active control mount

18 A/C CTRL PNL 15 A Air conditioning system

19 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system

20 AM2 7.5 A Starting system

21 EFI MAIN 30 AEFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, fuel system, ECT system

22 AMP 30 A Audio system

23 AMP2 30 A Audio system

24 DOOR NO.1 25 A Power door lock system

25 RADIO NO.1 15 A Audio system

26 ECU-B NO.1 10 A ECU powers

27 DOME 10 A Interior lights, meters, vanity lights

28 H-LP (LH) 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)

29 H-LP (RH) 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

348


30 H-LP (LL) 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)

31 H-LP (RL) 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)

32 HORN 10 A Horns

33 EFI NO.1 10 AMultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem, ECT system

34 MPX-B 10 A Meters

35 A/F 20 AMultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem

36 S-HORN 7.5 A Horn

37 EFI NO.2 15 AMultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem

38 EFI NO.3 10 AMultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem

Fuse Ampere Circuit

349


4


■ Driver’s side instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 RR DOOR RH 25 A Power window

2 RR DOOR LH 25 A Power window

3 FUEL OPN 7.5 A Fuel filler door opener

4 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights

5 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system

6 ECU-B NO.2 7.5 A ECU powers

7 STOP 10 A Stop lights

8 TI & TE 30 A Tilt and telescopic steering

9 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system

10 PWR 25 A Power windows

11 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU

12 S/ROOF 30 A Moon roof

13 TAIL 10 AFront and rear side marker lights, tail lights, license plate lights

14 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination

350


15 ECU-IG NO. 1 10 A

Moon roof, seat heaters, power win-dows, clock, automatic windshield wiper, electric cooling fans, driving position memory system, seat position memory system

16 ECU-IG NO. 2 7.5 A

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stabil-ity control system, traction control sys-tem, brake assist system, cruise control system, stop lights, shift lock control system

17 A/C NO. 2 10 AAir conditioning system, rear window defogger

18 WASH 10 A Windshield washer

19 S-HTR 20 A Seat heaters, air conditioning system

20 GAUGE NO. 1 10 AEmergency flashers, back-up lights, rear sunshade, charging system

21 WIP 25 A Windshield wipers

22 H-LP LVL 7.5 A Headlight leveling system

23 IGN 10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection sys-tem, SRS airbag system, steering lock system

24 GAUGE NO. 2 7.5 A Meters

25 ECU-ACC 7.5 A Clock, main body ECU

26 CIG 20 A Cigarette lighter

27 PWR OUTLET 20 A Power outlet

28 RADIO NO. 2 7.5 A Audio system

29 MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

Fuse Ampere Circuit

351


4


30 POWER 30 A Power window

31 P/SEAT 30 A Power seat

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb mayneed replacement. (P. 354)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

CAUTION

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any otherobject in place of a fuse.

●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

●Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexusdealer.

Fuse Ampere Circuit

352


Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights)

■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts

Adjustment bolt AAdjustment bolt B

■ Before checking the headlight aimMake sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area aroundthe headlight is not deformed.Park the vehicle on level ground.Sit in the driver’s seat.Bounce the vehicle several times.

■ Adjusting the headlight aimRemove the engine compartment cover. (P. 312)

Turn bolt A in either directionusing a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Remember the turning directionand the number of turns in mind.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

353


4


Turn bolt B the same number ofturns and in the same directionas step 1 using a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If the error is over the valuespecified above, take the vehicleto your Lexus dealer to adjustthe headlight aim.

STEP 3

354


Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information aboutreplacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 431)

■ Front bulb locations

■ Rear bulb locations

Headlight high beam

Headlightlow beam(halogenbulb)

Front turn signal light

Front side marker light

Parking light

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail light

Rear side marker light

355


4


Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlight low beams (for vehicles without discharge bulbs)Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 312)

Unplug the connector.

Remove the cover.

Release the lock.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

356


Remove the light bulb.

■ Headlight high beamsRemove the engine compartment cover. (P. 312)

Turn the bulb base counterclock-wise.

Unplug the connector whiledepressing the lock release.

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

357


4


■ Parking lights, front side marker lights and front turn signal lights

Remove the access hole cover.

Parking light and front sidemarker lightFront turn signal light


Parking light and front side marker light


STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

358


Front turn signal light


■ Stop/tail, rear turn signal and rear side marker lights

Open the trunk lid and remove theaccess hole cover.

Stop/tail lightRear turn signal lightRear side marker light


STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

359


4


Stop/tail light


Rear turn signal light


Rear side marker light


STEP 3

STEP 3

STEP 3

360


■ Bulbs other than the aboveIf any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealerreplace it.

● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs)

● Front fog lights

● Tail lights

● High mounted stoplight

● License plate lights

● Back-up lights

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Tempo-rary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate amalfunction.

●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

●Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ Discharge headlights

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or maygo out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power isrestored.

■ LED stop lights

The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burnout, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.

361


4


CAUTION

■ Replacing light bulbs

●Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-ing off the headlights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb bythe plastic or metal portion.If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so mayresult in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damagethe headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

●Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors,power supply circuits, or related components.Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.

■ Discharge headlights

●Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including lightbulbs).

●Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket whenthe headlights are turned on.An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result inserious injury or death by electric shock.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

362


When trouble arises 5

363


Emergency flashers .............. 364

If your vehicle needs to be towed ................................ 365

If you think something is wrong ................................... 371

Fuel pump shut off system..................................... 372

Event data recorder.............. 373


If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds..................................... 375

If a warning message is displayed................................ 386

If you have a flat tire............... 397

If the engine will not start .... 407

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ....................... 409

If you lose your keys ............... 410

If the electronic key does not operate properly............ 411

If the vehicle battery is discharged ............................. 413

If your vehicle overheats ...... 416

If the vehicle becomes stuck......................................... 419

364


Emergency flashers

NOTICE


Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine isnot running.

Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in anaccident.


Press the switch to flash all theturn signal lights. To turn themoff, press the switch once again.


Press the switch to flash all theturn signal lights. To turn themoff, press the switch once again.

5

When trouble arises

365


If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contactyour Lexus dealer before towing.

● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towingeyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short dis-tances at low speeds.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehi-cle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condi-tion.

Towing eyelet

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by yourLexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flatbed truck.Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincialand local laws.If towing from the front, the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles must be in goodcondition. (P. 369)If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

366


Installing towing eyelet

Remove the eyelet cover using aflat head screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place arag between the screwdriver andthe vehicle body, as shown in theillustration.

■ Emergency towing procedure

Release the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off)or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).

CAUTION

■ Caution while towing

●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress onthe emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.

● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will notfunction, making steering and braking more difficult.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with front wheels on the ground.This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

5

When trouble arises

367


Insert the towing eyelet into thehole and tighten partially by hand.

Tighten down the towing eyeletsecurely using a wheel nut wrench.

STEP 2

STEP 3

■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet

P. 397

CAUTION

■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelet are installed securely.If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may leadto accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

368


Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

■ To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.

5

When trouble arises

369


Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From the front


From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the frontwheel.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at theopposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle couldbe damaged while being towed.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.

370


Using a flat bed truck

If your Lexus is transported by aflat bed truck, it should be tieddown at the locations shown in theillustration.

If you use chains or cables to tiedown your vehicle, the anglesshaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie downsor the vehicle may be damaged.

Front

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not use the rear transport eyelets.They are used for shipping purposes only.

5

When trouble arises

371


If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needsadjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Visible symptoms● Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually pointshigher than normal

■ Audible symptoms● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

■ Operational symptoms● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touchesthe floor

372


Fuel pump shut off system

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is acti-vated.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY modeor OFF.Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damagedand is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbaginflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel tothe engine.

STEP 1

STEP 2

5

When trouble arises

373


Event data recorder

In a crash or a near car crash event

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a nearcar crash event, this device may record some or all of the following infor-mation:

● Engine speed

● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

● Vehicle speed

● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

● Position of the transmission shift lever

● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not

● Driver's seat position

● SRS airbag deployment data

● SRS airbag system diagnostic data

● Front passenger's occupant classification

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improv-ing vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDRdoes not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects ofyour vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimalvehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system tothat record data in a crash or a near car crash event.

374


Disclosure of the data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third partyexcept when:

● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for aleased vehicle) is obtained

● Officially requested by the police or other authorities

● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit

● Ordered by a court law

However, if necessary Lexus will:

● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance

● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed neces-sary

● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification informationto a non-Lexus organization for research purposes

5

When trouble arises

375


If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexusdealer.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

P. 389

Warning light Warning light/Details

(USA)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*Indicates the following;• Low brake fluid• Malfunction in the brake booster system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on orflash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessar-ily indicate a malfunction in the system.

376


Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehiclethat may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe placeand contact your Lexus dealer.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to thesystem operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have thevehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.


Charging system warning lightIndicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

(USA)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lampIndicates the following:• Empty fuel tank• Loose fuel tank• Malfunction in the electronic engine control system;• Malfunction in the electronic throttle control system; or• Malfunction in the electronic automatic transmission con-

trol system.


SRS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:• The SRS airbag system; or• Front passenger occupant classification system• The seat belt pretensioner system.

5

When trouble arises

377


Follow the correction procedure.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, checkthat the warning light turns off.


(USA)

(Canada)

ABS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:• The ABS; or• The brake assist system.

Pre-collision system warning lightIndicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light(warning buzzer*1)

Indicates that a door or trunk is not fully closed.

Check that all doors and the trunk are closed.

Rear light failure warning light

Indicates one or more stop lights are burned out.

Have the defective bulbs replaced by your Lexus dealer.

Low fuel level warning lightIndicates remaining fuel level is low.(Approximately 2.8 gal. [10.5 L, 2.3 Imp.gal.] or less)

Refuel the vehicle.

378


Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer*2)

Warns the driver to fasten his or her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

(without navi-gation system)

(with naviga-tion system)

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light(warning buzzer*2)

Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure.

Adjust the tire inflation pres-sure.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:Malfunction in the tire pres-sure warning system

Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.


5

When trouble arises

379


*1: Open door warning buzzer:

P. 389

*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert thedriver and front passenger that his or her sear belt is not fastened. The buzzersounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed ofat least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzerwill sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Master warning lightA buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

P. 386

■ First check when the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

Check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?If it is, tighten it securely.

The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer assoon as possible.


380


■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the following:

• The airbag sensor assembly• The front airbag sensors• The side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies• The curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies• The driver’s seat position sensor• The driver’s seat belt buckle switch• Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors)• AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights• Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch• The seat belt pretensioner assemblies• The inflators• The interconnecting wiring and power sources

■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light may flash and buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tirepressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural airleaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

5

When trouble arises

381


■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

Full-size spare tire

The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the sparetire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with therepaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warninglight will turn off after a few minutes.

Compact spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off eventhough the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with therepaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warninglight will turn off after a few minutes.

382


■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-tered in the tire pressure warning computer.

● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.

● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed (vehicles with full-size spare tire).

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels orwheel housings.

● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tirepressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used.

● If the full-size spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal recep-tion.

● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in thetrunk (vehicles with full-size spare tire).

5

When trouble arises

383


■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequentlywhen the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, haveit checked by your Lexus dealer.


The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizablefeatures P. 447)

CAUTION

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss ofvehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-sure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexusdealer.

●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you couldlose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

384


CAUTION

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when coldand inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handlingand stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination ofthe TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. TheTPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warningsystem) to continue to function properly.

5

When trouble arises

385


NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warn-ing system may not operate properly.

386


If a warning message is displayed

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehiclethat may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe placeand contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning message Details

(Flashing)

Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.A buzzer also sounds.

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and per-form the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light alsocomes on or flashes in order toindicate that a message is cur-rently being displayed on themulti-information display.


If any of the warning message turns on again after performing the fol-lowing actions, contact your Lexus dealer.

5

When trouble arises

387


Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to thesystem operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have thevehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.


(Flashing)

Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.A buzzer also sounds.

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.A buzzer also sounds.

388



(If equipped)

Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction.A buzzer also sounds.The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on the display.

(Flashing)

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system.

A buzzer also sounds.Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF and then to IGNITION ON mode again to reset the cruise control system.

Indicates a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC sys-tems.

5

When trouble arises

389


Follow the correction procedure.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, checkthat the warning message turns off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed.

The system also indi-cates which doors are not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-cate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Make sure that all of the doors are closed.

Indicates that the hood is not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-cate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Close the hood.

390



Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed.

flashes and a

buzzer sounds to indi-cate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Close the trunk.

(Flashing)

Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and the driver’s door opened).

A buzzer also sounds.

Close the moon roof.

(Flashing)

Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of more than 3 mph [5 km/h]).



Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.

A buzzer also sounds.Add washer fluid.

5

When trouble arises

391



Indicates that engine oil level is low.


Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.

(USA only)

Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.


Check and the engine oil, and change if necessary.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil mainte-nance data has been reset.)

(USA only)

Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.


Check and change the engine oil.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset).

392



(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the pre-collision system is not currently functional.


Clean the grille and the sensor.

This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the sensor of intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice.


Clean the sensor.

(Flashing)

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice.


Clean the sensor.

5

When trouble arises

393



(Flashing and then con-tinuously on)

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance because the windshield wipers are set at high speed operation mode.


Turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode.

(Flashing)(If equipped)

Indicates that your vehi-cle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode).


Slow the vehicle by apply-ing the brakes.

■ Changing the engine oil (USA only)

Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 313)

■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode

In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-vehicle distance closes.

●When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or thevehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle

●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed

● Immediately after cruise control speed is set

●At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed

394


Follow the correction procedure for problem in smart access system with push-button start.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, checkthat the warning message turns off.

Interiorbuzzer

Exteriorbuzzer

Warning message DetailsCorrection procedure

Once (Comes on for 8 seconds.)

(Flashing)

Indicates that an attempt was made to start the engine without the elec-tronic key being present, or the electronic key was not functioning normally.

Start the engine with the elec-tronic key present.*

Once 3 times

(Flashing)

Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the elec-tronic key outside of the detection area.

Confirm the loca-tion of the elec-tronic key.

5

When trouble arises

395


Interiorbuzzer

Exteriorbuzzer


Once 3 times

(Flashing)

Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key.

Con-tinuous

Con-tinuous

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashing)

Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the shift lever out of in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the elec-tronic key outside of the detection area.

• Shift the shift lever to P.

• Confirm the location of the electronic key.

Once

(Flashing)

Indicates that the key battery is low.

Replace the bat-tery. (P. 342)

396


*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficultiesreceiving the signal from the key. (P. 26)

Interiorbuzzer

Exteriorbuzzer


Indicates that a door has been opened or closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched twice to ACCESSORY mode from OFF.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while applying the brakes.

(Comes on for 15 seconds.)

(Flashing)

Indicates that the steering lock has not released.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turn-ing the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed.

Once Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly.

P. 412

5

When trouble arises

397


If you have a flat tire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P.

● Stop the engine.

● Turn on the emergency flashers.

■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack

Jack handle

Spare tire Compact spare tire

WrenchTowing eyelet

398


Taking out the jack

Lift up the hook of the panel on thetrunk floor.

Secure the panel using the hookprovided.

Remove the hook.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

5

When trouble arises

399


Taking out the spare tire

Lift up the hook of the panel on thetrunk floor.

Secure the panel using the hookprovided.

Loosen the center fastener thatsecures the spare tire.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

400


Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (oneturn).

Turn the jack portion “A” by handuntil the notch of the jack is in con-tact with the jack point.

STEP 1

Flat tire Wheel chock positions

Front

Left-hand side

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Rear

Left-hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

STEP 2

STEP 3

5

When trouble arises

401


Raise the vehicle until the tire isslightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and thetire.

When resting the tire on theground, place the tire so that thewheel design faces up to avoidscratching the wheel surface.

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign matterfrom the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheelcontact surface, the wheel nutsmay loosen while the vehicle is inmotion, and the tire may come offthe vehicle.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

402


Install the spare tire and looselytighten each nut by hand toapproximately the same amount.

Turn the lug nuts until the washerscome into contact with the wheel.

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two orthree times in the order shown inthe illustration.

Tightening torque:10.5 kgf•m (103 N•m, 76 ft•lbf)

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

STEP 2

Wheel nut

Washer

Disc wheel

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

5

When trouble arises

403


■ The compact spare tire

●The compact spare tire is identified by the label TEMPORARY USE ONLY onthe tire sidewall.Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

●Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 429)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if youreplace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, thelight remains on.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with com-pact spare tire)

Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the following stepsand fit tire chains to the front tires.

Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-cle.

Fit tire chains to the front tires.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 328)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

404


CAUTION

■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle sud-denly falling off the jack.

●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing andremoving tire chains.

●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tireson this vehicle.

●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on ornear the vehicle may be injured.

■ Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 10.5 kgf•m (103 N•m, 76ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

5

When trouble arises

405


CAUTION

■ When using the compact spare tire

●Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with yourvehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

●Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.

●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observethis precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ When the compact spare tire attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems maynot operate correctly:

●ABS & Brake assist

●VSC

●TRAC

●Navigation system (if equipped)

406


NOTICE

■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheelbeyond repair.

■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve andtransmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared towhen driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road sur-faces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

5

When trouble arises

407


If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures arebeing followed (P. 116), consider each of the following points.

■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operatesnormally.One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.Add fuel to the vehicle.

● The engine may be flooded.Try to restart the engine once more following correct startingprocedures. (P. 116)

● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 70)

■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low vol-ume.One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● The battery may be discharged. (P. 413)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

■ The starter motor does not turn overOne of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an elec-trical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However,an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 408)

408


Emergency start function

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as aninterim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switchis functioning normally.

Set the parking brake.Shift the shift lever to P.Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORYmode.Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 sec-onds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system maybe malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (P. 413)

● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or ifrepair procedures are unknown.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

5

When trouble arises

409


If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may bea problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental opera-tion of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealerimmediately.The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure thatthe shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORYmode.Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

Press the shift lock override but-ton.

The shift lever can be shiftedwhile the button is pressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

410


If you lose your keys

New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the otherkey and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

5

When trouble arises

411


If the electronic key does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions

Remove the cover on the driver’sdoor handle using the mechanicalkey (P. 20) in order to performthe following operations.

Locks all doorsCloses the windows/standardmoon roof (turn and hold)Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocksthe driver's door. Turning the keyonce again unlocks the otherdoors.

Opens the windows/standardmoon roof (turn and hold)

Return the cover to the originalposition after use.

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted(P. 26) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery isdepleted, smart access system with push-button start and wireless remotecontrol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or theengine can be started by following the procedure below.

412


Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.

Touch the Lexus emblem side ofthe electronic key to the“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

An alarm will sound to indicate thatthe start function cannot detect theelectronic key that is touched tothe “ENGINE START STOP”switch if any of the doors is openedand closed while the key is touchedto the switch.

To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal andpress the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can bechanged each time the switch is pressed. (P. 116)To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switchwithin 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brakepedal depressed.

In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be oper-ated, contact your Lexus dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

■ Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you nor-mally do when stopping the engine.

■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommend that the elec-tronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 342)

STEP 3

5

When trouble arises

413


If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’sbattery is discharged.You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehiclewith a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the stepsbelow.

Remove the cover.

Connecting the jumper cables.

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehiclePositive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicleNegative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicleConnect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in theillustration.

STEP 1

STEP 2

414


■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■ Avoiding a discharged battery

●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.

●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at alow speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the enginespeed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch OFF.Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the“ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode,then start the vehicle’s engine.Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumpercables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealeras soon as possible.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

5

When trouble arises

415


CAUTION

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammablegas that may be emitted from the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is notunintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-nals.

●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near thebattery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related partscontain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when han-dling the battery.

●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not toallow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehi-cle body.

●Do not lean over the battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can bereceived.

●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and otherbattery-related parts.

●Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or anyof the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

416


If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic airconditioning system.Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.If you see steam:

Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-sides and then restart the engine.

If you do not see steam:Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 312)Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.If the fan is operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on theinstrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.

If the fan is not operating: Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexusdealer.

After the engine has cooleddown sufficiently, check theengine coolant level and inspectthe radiator core (radiator) forany leaks.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

5

When trouble arises

417


■ Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.

●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power isexperienced.

●Steam is coming from under the hood.

Add engine coolant if required.

Water can be used in an emer-gency measure if engine coolantis unavailable. (P. 426)

Install the reservoir cap.

Make sure that the engine cool-ant reservoir hose is positionedas shown in the illustration.

Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as pos-sible.

STEP 6

STEP 7

418


CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until thesteam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing seriousinjury such as burns.

●Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine isrunning.

●Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam releasedunder pressure.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quicklycan cause damage to the engine.

5

When trouble arises

419


If the vehicle becomes stuck

CAUTION

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surround-ing area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehiclemay also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extremecaution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause anaccident and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

●Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may requiretowing to be freed.

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomesstuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

● Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.

● Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

● Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide trac-tion under the tires.

● Restart the engine.

● Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

420


Vehicle specifications 6

421

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 422

Fuel information ..................... 432

Tire information...................... 435

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ........ 447

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize .................... 452

422

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

*: Unladen vehicle

Overall length 191.1 in. (4855 mm)

Overall width 71.7 in. (1820 mm)

Overall height * 57.1 in. (1450 mm)

Wheelbase 109.3 in. (2775 mm)

TreadFront 62.0 in. (1575 mm)

Rear 61.6 in. (1565 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight(Occupants + luggage)

900 lb. (410 kg)

Towing capacity(trailer weight + cargo weight)

1000 lb. (450 kg)

423

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identificationThe vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for yourvehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is usedin registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the topleft of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certifi-cation Label.

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped onthe engine block as shown.

424

6-1. Specifications

Engine

Fuel

Model 2GR-FE

Type6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm)

Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher

Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 lmp.gal)

425

6-1. Specifications

6


Lubrication system

Oil viscosity

● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oilwhich allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easierstarting of the engine in cold weather.

● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operatingtemperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if thevehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.

Oil capacity (drain and refill)

without filter 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 lmp.qt.)

with filter 6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.3 lmp.qt.)

Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below.

5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.

Outside temperature

426

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Ignition system

Capacity9.5 qt.(9.0 L, 7.9 lmp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-sili-

cate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate cool-ant with long-life organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Spark plug

MakeDENSO

GapFK20HR110.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only above spark plugs. Do not adjust gaps for your engine performance orsmooth driveability.

427

6-1. Specifications

6


Electrical system

Automatic Transaxle

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contactyour Lexus dealer.

Battery

Open voltage at 68F (20C):

12.6 12.8 V Fully charged12.2 12.4 V Half charged11.8 12.0 V Discharged(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off)

Charging rates 5 A max.

Fluid capacity* 6.87 qt. (6.5 L, 5.72 lmp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may causedeterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transaxle accompanied by vibration,and ultimately damage the automatic transaxle of your vehicle.

428

6-1. Specifications

Brakes

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51kgf) while the engine is running.

*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,30.6 kgf).

Steering

Pedal clearance *1 2.4 in. (61 mm) Min.

Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)

Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel *2 7 10 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Power steering fluidAutomatic transmission fluidDEXRON® II or III

429

6-1. Specifications

6


Tires and wheels

Type A

Tire size P215/55R17 93V

Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditionsFront:30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)

When driving at high speeds above 100 mph(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds arepermitted by law, add 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflationpressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Towing a trailerFront:32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)Spare:32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 17 7J

Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

430

6-1. Specifications

Type B

Tire sizeP215/55R17 93V,T155/70D17 110M (spare)

Tire inflation pressure(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditionsFront: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)*Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)*Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)*:When driving at high speeds above 100

mph (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the max-imum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Towing a trailerFront:32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)Rear:32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 17 7J, 17 4T (spare)

Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

431

6-1. Specifications

6


Light bulbs

*: If equipped

A: D4S discharge bulbsB: H7 halogen bulbsC: HB3 halogen bulbsD: HB4 halogen bulbsE: Wedge base bulbs (amber)F: Wedge base bulbs (clear)G: Double end bulbs

Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type

Exterior

Headlights (low beam)Discharge bulbs*Halogen bulbs*

D4SH7

3555

AB

Headlights (high beam) 9005 60 C

Front fog lights 9006 51 D

Front turn signal lights 21 E

Parking lights and front side marker lights

5 F

Trunk light 5 G

Rear side marker lights 194 3.8 F

Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 F

Tail lights 7443 5 F

Rear turn signal lights 21 E

Back-up lights 921 16 F

Outer foot lights 5 F

InteriorVanity lights 8 F

Door courtesy lights 5 F

432

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that onlyaccommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If your engine knocks

●Consult your Lexus dealer.

●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceleratingor driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline youare using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If thisdoes not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research OctaneNumber 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octanerating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gaso-line with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Per-sistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected byrefueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications ofASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

433

6-1. Specifications

6


■ Gasoline quality standards

●Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that isexpected to be applied worldwide.

●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emissionlevels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, andcustomer satisfaction through better performance.

■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives toavoid build-up of engine deposits.

●All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keepclean intake systems.

■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygen-ates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in manyareas.

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline

●Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lowerthan 87.

●Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopen-tadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

434

6-1. Specifications

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.

●Do not use leaded gasoline.Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic convert-ers causing the emission control system to malfunction.

●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

●Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engineknocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be cor-rected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot start-ing, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

435

6-1. Specifications

6


Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Standard tire

Compact spare tire

436

6-1. Specifications

Tire size (P. 437)DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 437)Location of treadwear indicators (P. 326)Tire ply composition and materialsPlies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strandswhich form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tiresA radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is abias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPEA tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. Atube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-sure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 330)Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 429)This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality gradingFor details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

Summer tire or all season tire (P. 331)An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is asummer tire.

TEMPORARY USE ONLY (P. 403)A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emer-gency use only.

437

6-1. Specifications

6


Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol*Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire manufacturer's identifica-tion markTire size codeManufacturer's optional tiretype code (3 or 4 letters)Manufacturing weekManufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies thatthe tire conforms to applicableFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards.

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typicaltire size.

Tire use(P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use)Section width (millimeters)Aspect ratio(tire height to section width)Tire construction code(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)Wheel diameter (inches)Load index (2 or 3 digits)Speed symbol(alphabet with one letter)

438

6-1. Specifications

■ Tire dimensions

Section widthTire heightWheel diameter

Tire section names

BeadSidewallShoulderTreadBeltInner linerReinforcing rubberCarcassRim linesBead wiresChafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulationsissued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of theU.S.A. Department of Transportation.It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehi-cles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you readthis information.

439

6-1. Specifications

6


■ DOT quality gradesAll passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

■ TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times aswell on the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, andthey represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) trac-tion.

440

6-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representingthe tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail-ure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pres-sure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pres-sure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a man-ufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmis-sion, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

441

6-1. Specifications

6


Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equip-ment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants speci-fied in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distributionDistribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim

RimA metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation Rim diameter and width

Rim type designationThe industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity


442

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (dis-tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two

Weather sideThe surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

BeadThe part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separationA breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

CarcassThe tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separationThe parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-pounds

CrackingAny parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material


443

6-1. Specifications

6


CT

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tireA tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs

InnerlinerThe layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separationThe parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard side-wall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other side-wall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tireA tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipur-pose passenger vehicles

Load ratingThe maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load ratingThe load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated


444

6-1. Specifications

Measuring rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open spliceAny parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall widthThe linear distance between the exteriors of the side-walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipur-pose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separationA parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fab-ric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section widthThe linear distance between the exteriors of the side-walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead


445

6-1. Specifications

6


*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load forvarious designated seating capacities

Sidewall separationThe parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,

and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )

on at least one sidewall

Test rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

TreadThat portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread ribA tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixtureThe fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing


446

6-1. Specifications

Designated seating capacity, Number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20 72 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

447

6


6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Item Function Default settingCustomized

setting

Smart access system with push-button start (P. 22)

Smart access system with push-button start

ON OFF

Operation signal(Emergency flashers)

ON OFF

Operation signal(Buzzer)

ON OFF

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personal-ized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires spe-cialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexusdealership.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functionsbeing customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

448

6-2. Customization

Wireless remote con-trol (P. 34)

Wireless remote control ON OFF

Unlocking operation

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one

step

Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

ON OFF

Time elapsed before auto-matic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

60 seconds

30 seconds

120 seconds

Operation signal(Emergency flashers)

ON OFF

Operation signal (Buzzer volume)

Level 7 Level 0 to 7

Door lock buzzer ON OFF

Trunk unlocking function ON OFF

Trunk unlocking operation Push and holdPush twice

One push

Panic function ON OFF


setting

449

6-2. Customization

6


Door lock (P. 37)

Unlocking using a key

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one

step

Speed-detecting auto-matic door lock function

OFF ON

Opening driver's door unlocks all doors

OFF ON

Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors

ON OFF

Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors.

ON OFF

Power win-dows (P. 60)

Linked mechanical key operation

ON(Open and

close)

OFF

Open only

Close only

Wireless remote control linked operation

ON(Open only)

OFF

Linked entry function ON OFF


setting

450

6-2. Customization

Moon roof (standard type)(P. 63)

Linked mechanical key operation

ON(Open and

close)

OFF

Open only

Close only

Linked operation of com-ponents when mechanical key is used

Slide only Tilt only

Wireless remote control linked operation

ON(Open only)

OFF

Linked operation of com-ponents when wireless remote control used

Slide only Tilt only

Linked entry function ON OFF

Automatic light control system (P. 135)

Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

30 seconds

0 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Lights (P. 135)

Daytime running light sys-tem (USA only)

ON OFF

Intuitive park-ing assist(P. 155)

Back sensor operation display and buzzer

ON OFF

Buzzer volume Level 3 Level 1 to 5

Distance which a sensor detects

4.5 ft. (150 cm) 1.8 ft. (60 cm)


setting

451

6-2. Customization

6


Multi-information display (P. 131)

Illumination(P. 253)

Time elapsed before lights turn off

15 seconds7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation when the doors are unlocked

ON OFF

Operation after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch turned OFF

ON OFF

Front foot well lighting ON OFF

Outer foot light ON OFF

Seat belt reminder(P. 377)

Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer

ON OFF

Country Available languages

Canada English and French


setting

452

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize

Item When to initialize Reference

Engine oil maintenance data (USA only)

After changing engine oil P. 313

Tire pressure warning system

When changing the tire inflation pres-sure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

P. 327

After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the battery, the follow-ing items must be initialized for normal system operation.

For owners 7

453

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..................... 454

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ............................. 455

454

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crashor could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, orLexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

455

7

For owners

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extractedfrom the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions inEnglish.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité

● Déroulez la sangle diagonale detelle sorte qu'elle passe bien surl'épaule, sans pour autant êtreen contact avec votre cou ouglisser de votre épaule.

● Placez la sangle abdominale leplus bas possible sur leshanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier desiège. Asseyez-vous le dos leplus droit possible et calez-vousbien dans le siège.

● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture desécurité.

Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)

Si la sangle diagonale est prochedu cou de la personne, faitescoulisser le guide de confort deceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.

456

Entretien et soin

■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont paseffilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

ATTENTION

■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité

Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pasentaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pasune ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinturede sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant encas d'accident.

Index

457

Abbreviation list .....................458

Alphabetical index..................460

What to do if... ........................470

For details of equipment related to the navigation system,such as the audio system and the air conditioning systems,refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

458

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

A/C Air Conditioning

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

AFS Adaptive Front lighting System

AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift

ALR Automatic Locking Retractor

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

ECU Electronic Control Unit

EDR Event data recorder

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M Emission inspection and maintenance

LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED Light Emitting Diode

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

OBD On Board Diagnostics

PCS Pre-Collision System

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TIN Tire Identification Number

TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC Traction Control

459

Abbreviation list

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

460

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A/C .............................................................188

ABS................................................................161

Adaptive front lighting system ......... 136

AFS .............................................................. 136

Air conditioning filter ..........................340

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter .......................340

Automatic air conditioning

system................................................... 188

Airbags

Airbag operating conditions........... 79

Airbag precautions for your

child..........................................................83

Airbag warning light ........................ 376

Curtain shield airbag operating

conditions..............................................80

Curtain shield airbag

precautions ..........................................83

Front passenger occupant

classification system.........................88

General airbag precautions ...........83

Locations of airbags.............................77

Modification and disposal of

airbags.................................................... 87

Proper driving posture ............. 75, 83

Side airbag operating

conditions..............................................80

Side airbag precautions ....................83

SRS airbags ..............................................77

Alarm.............................................................72

Antenna.................................................... 202

Anti-lock brake system......................... 161

Armrest .................................................... 273

Ashtray...................................................... 266

Audio input.............................................. 222

Audio system

Antenna.................................................. 202

Audio input............................................222

AUX adapter .......................................222

CD player/changer......................... 205

MP3/WMA disc................................... 211

Optimal use ........................................... 219

Portable music player ......................222

Radio .........................................................198

Steering wheel audio switch.........223

Automatic air conditioning

system ..................................................... 188

Automatic headlight leveling

system ......................................................137

Automatic light control system........ 135

Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission .....................119

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P...................................409

S mode ..................................................... 120

AUX adapter ......................................... 222

Auxiliary box .......................................... 262

A

461

Alphabetical index

Back-up lights

Wattage ...................................................431

Battery

Checking................................................322

If the vehicle has discharged

battery....................................................413

Preparing and checking

before winter...................................... 172

Bluetooth® ..............................................225

Brake

Fluid ............................................................319

Parking brake........................................ 123

Brake assist ............................................... 161

Break-in tips .............................................109

Care

Exterior ....................................................292

Interior..................................................... 295

Seat belts ............................................... 296

Cargo capacity .......................................168

Cargo hooks ...........................................278

CD changer ........................................... 205

CD player................................................ 205

Chains......................................................... 174

Child restraint system

Booster seats, definition.................... 93

Booster seats, installation............... 100

Convertible seats, definition ........... 93

Convertible seats, installation ...... 100


classification system ........................88

Infant seats, definition ......................... 93

Infant seats, installation..................... 100

Installing CRS with lower

anchorages...........................................98

Installing CRS with seat belts........100

Installing CRS with top straps....... 103

Child safety

Airbag precautions ..............................83

Battery precautions ............... 324, 415

Child restraint system.........................93

Child-protectors ...................................38

How your child should wear

the seat belt ..........................................53

Installing child restraints..................... 97

Moon roof precautions......................66

Power window lock switch..............60

Power window precautions ............62

Removed electronic key battery

precautions........................................343

Seat belt comfort guide .......................51

Seat belt extender precautions......55

Seat belt precautions ..........................53

Seat heater precautions....................271

Trunk precautions................................. 42

Child-protectors ......................................38

Cigarette lighter.................................... 267

Cleaning

Exterior....................................................292

Interior .....................................................295

Seat belts ................................................296

Clock .........................................................265

Compass ..................................................286

Condenser ............................................... 319

Console box ........................................... 257

B

C

462

Alphabetical index

Cooling system

Engine overheating ............................416

Cornering assist sensors .................... 155

Cruise control

Cruise control .......................................143

Dynamic radar cruise control .......146

Cup holders ............................................260

Curtain shield airbags............................ 77

Customizable features ....................... 447

Daytime running light system ........... 136

Defogger

Rear window......................................... 195

Side mirror ............................................. 195

Dimension................................................422

Dinghy towing .........................................185

Display

Dynamic radar cruise control .......146

Trip information .................................... 132

Warning message.............................386

Do-it-yourself maintenance .............304

Door courtesy lights

Door courtesy lights.........................253

Wattage....................................................431

Doors

Door glasses...........................................60

Door lock................................. 22, 34, 37

Side mirrors .............................................58

Driver's seat belt reminder light ..... 377

Driving

Break-in tips .......................................... 109

Correct posture .................................... 75

Procedures ............................................ 108

Winter driving tips............................... 172

Driving position memory...................... 44

Electronic key

If the electronic key does not

operate properly................................411

Emergency, in case of



If the engine will not start............... 407


shifted from P...................................409

If the vehicle has discharged

battery ................................................... 413

If the warning buzzer sounds.......375

If the warning light turns on...........375

If the warning message is

displayed............................................386

If you have a flat tire .........................397

If you lose your keys ..........................410

If you think something is

wrong .................................................... 371

If your vehicle becomes stuck ...... 419

If your vehicle needs to be

towed................................................... 365

If your vehicle overheats.................. 416

Emergency flashers

Switch...................................................... 364

Engine

Compartment .........................................311

Engine switch ..........................................116

Hood .......................................................308

How to start the engine .....................116

Identification number .......................423

If the engine will not start............... 407

Ignition switch .........................................116

Overheating .......................................... 416

Engine compartment cover ...............312

D

E

463

Alphabetical index

Engine coolant

Capacity................................................. 426

Checking................................................. 317


before winter...................................... 172

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ....................................................... 125

Engine immobilizer system..................70

Engine oil

Capacity................................................. 425

Checking.................................................313


before winter...................................... 172

Engine oil maintenance data.............316

Event data recorder.............................373

Floor mat................................................... 277

Fluid

Brake .........................................................319

Power steering fluid ......................... 320

Washer................................................... 325

Fog lights

Switch........................................................138

Wattage ...................................................431

Foot well lighting .................................. 253

Front fog lights

Switch........................................................138

Wattage ...................................................431


classification system ........................... 88

Front passenger's seat belt

reminder light ......................................377

Front seats

Adjustment ...............................................43

Driving position memory ..................44

Seat position memory ........................ 47

Front side marker lights

Replacing light bulbs........................357

Wattage................................................... 431

Front turn signal lights


Wattage................................................... 431

Fuel

Capacity .................................................424

Fuel gauge.............................................. 125

Fuel pump shut off system............. 372

Gas station information .................. 472

Information ............................................432

Refueling.................................................... 67

Fuel door ..................................................... 67

Fuel filler door ........................................... 67

Fuel pump shut off system................. 372

Fuses ..........................................................344

Garage door opener ......................... 280

Gas station information...................... 472

Gauges ...................................................... 125

Glove box ................................................256

Glove box light ...................................... 257

Grocery bag hooks .............................278

F

G

464

Alphabetical index

Hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone)

Bluetooth® ........................................... 225

Hands-free phone system

(for cellular phone)........................ 225

Hazard lights

Switch ......................................................364

Head restraints

Adjusting .................................................. 49

Headlight aim .........................................352

Headlights

Discharge headlights

precautions .........................................361


Switch ........................................................135

Wattage....................................................431

Heaters

Seat heaters................................269, 271

Side mirror ............................................. 195

Hood ......................................................... 308

Hooks

Cargo hooks ....................................... 278

Grocery bag hooks ......................... 278

Horn ............................................................ 124

I/M test .....................................................303

Identification number

Engine ......................................................423

Vehicle.....................................................423

Ignition switch ........................................... 116

Illuminated entry system.................... 253

Indicator lights ......................................... 127

Initialization

Items to initialize................................. 452

Inside rear view mirror .......................... 57

Interior lights

Interior lights ........................................ 255

Switch...................................................... 255

Intuitive parking assist.......................... 155

Jack

Positioning a floor jack ...................309

Vehicle-equipped jack....................397

Jack handle ............................................. 397

Keyless entry ............................................. 34

Keys

Electronic key .........................................20

Engine switch ..........................................116



If you lose your keys ..........................410

Key number..............................................20

Keyless entry............................................34

Keys..............................................................20

Mechanical key ......................................20

Wireless remote control key...........34

H I

J

K

465

Alphabetical index

Light bulbs

Replacing............................................... 354

Wattage ...................................................431

Lights

Door courtesy lights ........................ 253

Emergency flasher switch............. 364

Fog light switch.....................................138

Hazard light switch........................... 364

Headlights switch................................135

Interior light switch............................ 253

Outer foot lights................................. 253

Personal light switch ........................ 255

Replacing light bulbs ....................... 354

Shift lever lighting .............................. 253

Turn signal lever................................... 122

Vanity lights.......................................... 264

Wattage ...................................................431

Load capacity ............................................171

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 304

General maintenance ....................300

Maintenance data.............................. 422

Maintenance requirements ......... 298

Meter

Instrument panel light control........126

Meters....................................................... 125

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror .......................57

Side mirror heater .............................. 195

Side mirrors ............................................ 58

Vanity mirrors......................................264

Moon roof...................................................63

MP3 disc .....................................................211

Multi-information display .....................131

Odometer................................................. 125

Oil

Engine oil................................................. 313

Opener

Fuel filler door......................................... 67

Hood.......................................................308

Trunk .............................................................41

Outer foot lights

Outer foot lights .................................253

Wattage................................................... 431

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding......................... 58

Mirror position memory....................44

Outside temperature display ........... 132

Overhead console ...............................259

Overheating, Engine............................ 416

L M

O

466

Alphabetical index

Parking assist sensors .......................... 155

Parking brake.......................................... 123

Parking lights


Switch ........................................................135

Wattage....................................................431

PCS ............................................................. 164

Personal lights

Switch ......................................................255

Power outlet............................................268

Power steering fluid.............................320

Power windows ........................................60

Pre-collision system.............................. 164

Radar cruise control ............................. 146

Radiator ..................................................... 319

Radio................................................................ 198

Radio data system ................................. 199

RDS ............................................................. 199

Rear side marker lights


Wattage....................................................431

Rear sunshade ....................................... 274

Rear turn signal lights


Wattage....................................................431

Rear window defogger........................ 195

Replacing

Electronic key battery...................... 342

Fuses ........................................................ 344

Light bulbs.............................................354

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners..........................................454

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ......................... 51

Automatic Locking Retractor .........52

Child restraint system

installation ..............................................97

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts .................................... 296

Emergency Locking Retractor ......52

How to wear your seat belt ............ 50

How your child should wear

the seat belt...........................................53

Pregnant women,

proper seat belt use .........................52

Reminder light......................................377

Seat belt extenders...............................53

Seat belt pretensioners ....................... 51

Seat heaters ...................................269, 271

Seat position memory.............................47

Seat ventilators ........................................271

Seating capacity....................................... 171

Seats

Adjustment ...............................................43

Adjustment precautions ....................43

Child seats/child restraint

system installation..............................97

Cleaning ................................................ 295

Driver’s seat position memory .......44

Front passenger seat position

memory ..................................................47

Head restraint .........................................49

Properly sitting in the seat.................75

Seat heaters ............................................271

Ventilated seats.....................................271

Service reminder indicators ............. 127

P

R

S

467

Alphabetical index

Shift lever

Automatic transmission......................119


shifted from P...................................409

Shift lever lighting................................. 253

Shift lock system ................................... 409

Side airbags................................................ 77

Side marker lights


Switch........................................................135

Wattage ...................................................431

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding .........................58

Mirror position memory ....................44

Smart access system with

push-button start

Entry function ..........................................22

Starting the engine................................116

Spare tire

Inflation pressure ............................... 334

Storage location................................. 397

Spark plug ................................................426

Specifications..........................................422

Speech command switch*

Speedometer........................................... 125

Steering wheel

Audio switches ....................................223

Power adjustment ................................ 56

Steering wheel position

memory ..................................................44

Stop lights


Wattage ...................................................431

Storage feature ..................................... 256

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes stuck...... 419

Sun visors .................................................263

Sunshade

Rear........................................................... 274

Roof..............................................................65

Switch

Emergency flasher switch .............364

Engine switch.......................................... 116

Fog light switch .................................... 138

Hazard light switch ...........................364

Ignition switch ......................................... 116

Light switches ....................................... 135

Power door lock switch .................... 37

Power window switch ........................60

Window lock switch............................60

Wipers and washer switch ............ 139

Tachometer.............................................. 125

Tail lights


Switch........................................................ 135

Wattage................................................... 431

Talk switch*

Telephone switch*

Theft deterrent system

Alarm........................................................... 72

Engine immobilizer system..............70

Theft prevention labels .......................... 74

Tire inflation pressure .........................334

Tire information

Glossary ................................................ 440

Size............................................................437

Tire identification number..............437

Uniform tire quality grading ........ 438

T

*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

468

Alphabetical index

Tires

Chains ....................................................... 174

Checking ...............................................326

If you have a flat tire.......................... 397

Inflation pressure................................334

Inflation pressure sensor................ 327

Information............................................435

Replacing............................................... 397

Rotating tires ........................................326

Size ........................................................... 429

Snow tires ................................................ 176

Spare tire................................................ 397

Tools ...........................................................397

Total load capacity .................................. 171

Towing

Dinghy towing...................................... 185

Emergency towing ...........................365

Trailer towing.........................................178

TRAC............................................................161

Traction control ........................................161

Trip meter ................................................. 125

Trunk

Extending a space............................. 276

Opener........................................................ 41

Trunk light

Trunk light..................................................42

Wattage....................................................431

Turn signal lights


Switch ........................................................ 122

Wattage....................................................431

Vanity lights

Vanity lights...........................................264

Wattage ................................................... 431

Vanity mirrors ........................................ 264

Vehicle identification number......... 423

Vehicle stability control ........................ 161

Ventilators .................................................271

VSC .............................................................. 161

Warning buzzers

Brake system........................................375

Downshifting............................................ 121

Open door ...........................................377

Seat belt reminder .............................377

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system ...................376

Brake assist system ...........................376

Brake system........................................375

Charging system................................376

Low fuel level........................................377

Low tire pressure warning

light.........................................................377

Malfunction indicator lamp ...........376

Master warning light.........................377

Open door ............................................377

Pre-collision system..........................376

Pretensioners .......................................376

Rear light failure warning light .....377

Seat belt reminder light ...................377

SRS airbags...........................................376

V

W

469

Alphabetical index

Warning messages

Dynamic radar

cruise control .......................387, 389

Engine oil level....................................389

Engine oil maintenance..................389

Engine oil pressure...........................386

Hood .......................................................389

Intuitive parking assist

sensor ......................................387, 389

Moon roof.............................................389

Open door ...........................................389

Parking brake......................................389

Pre-collision system.............387, 389

Smart access system with

push-button start............................ 394

Steering lock........................................ 387

Traction control.................................. 387

Trunk........................................................389

Vehicle stability control.................. 387

Washer fluid.........................................389

Washer

Checking............................................... 325


before winter...................................... 172

Switch........................................................139

Washing and waxing ...........................292

Weight

Cargo capacity ....................................168

Load limits ................................................. 171

Weight .....................................................422

Wheels ..................................................... 338

Window glasses ...................................... 60

Window lock switch............................... 60

Windows

Power windows.....................................60

Rear window defogger.................... 195

Washer .................................................... 139

Windshield wipers

Position......................................................175

Windshield wipers ............................. 139

Wireless remote control key

Replacing the battery.......................342

Wireless remote control key ..........34

WMA disc ..................................................211

470

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures P. 397 If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

P. 407 If the engine will not startP. 70 Engine immobilizer system

P. 411If the electronic key does not operate properly

The shift lever cannot be moved out

P. 409If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

P. 416 If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost P. 410 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out P. 413 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked P. 37 Doors

The horn begins to sound P. 72 Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 419 If the vehicle becomes stuck

471

What to do if...

■Warning lights

The warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 375If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

or or

P. 375 P. 376

P. 377or

P. 376or

P. 377 P. 377

P. 376 P. 377

P. 377 P. 376

P. 377 P. 377

P. 376

Brake system warning light Malfunction indicator lamp

“ABS” warning light Driver’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Low fuel level warning light

SRS warning light Master warning light

Open door warning light Pre-collision system warn-ing light

Rear light failure warning light

Tire pressure warning light

Charging system warning light

472

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 308

Trunk opener

P. 41

Fuel filler door

P. 67

Hood lock release lever

P. 308

Fuel filler door opener

P. 67

Tire inflation pressure

P. 429

Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70L, 15.4 lmp.gal.)

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 68, 424

Cold tire inflation pressure P. 429

Engine oil capacity(Drain and refill)

qt. (L, Imp.qt.)Without filter 6.0 (5.7, 5.0)With filter 6.4 (6.1, 5.3)

Engine oil typeToyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalentOil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 425Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30

TABLE OF CONTENTS When driving - Lexus Drivers · 2016-06-23 · TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 Before...

Documents

Transcript of TABLE OF CONTENTS When driving - Lexus Drivers · 2016-06-23 · TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 Before...